Garmin | G1000: Piper PA-32 | Garmin G1000: Piper PA-32 G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32

Garmin G1000: Piper PA-32 G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
Piper
PA32
Copyright © 2007 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0648.05 or later for the Piper PA32. Some differences in operation may be
observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200
Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411
Fax 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Unit 5, The Quadrangle, Abbey Park Industrial Estate, Romsey, Hampshire S051 9DL, U.K.
Tel: 44/0870.851241
Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199
Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® and G1000® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. FliteCharts™, and SafeTaxi™ are trademarks of
Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; Stormscope® and SkyWatch® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications;
and XM® is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
April 2007
Printed in the U.S.A.
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY
This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase. Within this
period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made
at no charge to the customer for parts and labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty
does not cover failures due to abuse, misuse, accident, or unauthorized alterations or repairs.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software, or to offer a full refund of the purchase price, at its sole
discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating a Service Center near you, visit
the Garmin website at “http://www.garmin.com” or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800-800-1020.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
i
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain function.
The G1000 Terrain Proximity feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
Terrain Proximity feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use
in applications requiring a certified terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained from third party
sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The Garmin G1000 has a very high degree of functional integrity. However, the pilot must
recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable system failures is not
practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication
shown by the G1000. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of
cross-checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G1000 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and
could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74A Air Data
Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always
use pressure altitude displayed by the G1000 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: The Jeppesen database used in the G1000 system must be updated regularly in order to ensure
that its information remains current. Updates are released every 28 days. A database information packet is
included in the G1000 package. Pilots using an outdated database do so entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is
intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Traffic information shown on the G1000 Multi Function Display is provided as an aid in visually
acquiring traffic. Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual
acquisition of conflicting traffic.
WARNING: Use of the Stormscope is not intended for hazardous weather penetration (thunderstorm
penetration). Stormscope information, as displayed on the G1000 MFD, is to be used only for weather
avoidance, not penetration.
WARNING: XM Weather should not be used for hazardous weather penetration. Weather information
provided by the GDL 69 is approved only for weather avoidance, not penetration.
ii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: NEXRAD weather data is to be used for long-range planning purposes only. Due to inherent
delays in data transmission and the relative age of the data, NEXRAD weather data should not be used for
short-range weather avoidance.
WARNING: For safety reasons, G1000 operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
CAUTION: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G1000 utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G1000 can be
misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the G1000
Pilot’s Guide documentation and the Piper PA32 Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH). Thoroughly practice
basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications from the G1000
to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts,
etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
CAUTION: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the G1000 to attempt to penetrate
a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Airman’s Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an
intense radar echo”.
CAUTION: The Garmin G1000 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by
an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty
and the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
CAUTION: The GDU 104X PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that
is very sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM
THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G1000 panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G1000 system. Depictions of
equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
iii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our website at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more
discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after
the screen has been cleared.
iv
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-00692-00
190-00692-00
190-00692-00
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Revision
1
A
B
Date
1/15/07
3/15/07
4/4/07
Page Range
i – I-4
Initial release
All
Production release
All
Editorial changes
Description
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description ..............................................1-1
Line Replaceable Units (LRU) ..............................1-2
G1000 Controls.....................................................1-7
PFD/MFD Controls .....................................................1-7
Audio Panel Controls .................................................1-9
Secure Digital (SD) Cards ..................................1-12
System Power-up ................................................1-13
System Operation...............................................1-14
Normal Display Operation ........................................1-14
Reversionary Display Operation ................................1-14
AHRS Operation ......................................................1-15
G1000 System Annunciations ...................................1-17
Softkey Function ......................................................1-17
Accessing G1000 Functionality ........................1-25
Menus ....................................................................1-25
MFD Page Groups ....................................................1-25
MFD System Pages ..................................................1-29
Display Backlighting ..........................................1-38
Automatic Adjustment .............................................1-38
Manual Adjustment .................................................1-38
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments ................................................2-4
Airspeed Indicator .....................................................2-4
Attitude Indicator ......................................................2-6
Altimeter ..................................................................2-7
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) ......................................2-8
Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath Indicators 2-9
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) ...........................2-10
Course Deviation Indicator .......................................2-14
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data .................................2-21
Generic Timer ..........................................................2-21
System Time ............................................................2-22
Outside Air Temperature ...........................................2-23
Wind Data ..............................................................2-23
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications ........................2-24
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions .....2-25
G1000 Alerting System.............................................2-25
Marker Beacon Annunciations ..................................2-26
Traffic Annunciation .................................................2-26
vi
TAWS Annunciations ................................................2-27
Altitude Alerting ......................................................2-27
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting ...2-28
2.4 Abnormal Operations ........................................2-29
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 EIS Display.............................................................3-2
3.2 Engine Page ..........................................................3-4
Engine Temperature Group .........................................3-6
Electrical Group .........................................................3-7
Fuel Calculations Group .............................................3-7
3.3 EIS Display in Reversionary Mode......................3-8
Lean Display .............................................................3-9
System Display ........................................................3-12
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview ...............................................................4-1
PFD/MFD Controls and Frequency Display ....................4-2
Audio Panel Controls .................................................4-4
COM Operation .....................................................4-6
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation ....................4-6
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning .................................4-7
Quick-Tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz...................4-8
Auto-Tuning the COM Frequency.................................4-9
Frequency Spacing ...................................................4-13
Automatic Squelch...................................................4-14
Volume ...................................................................4-14
NAV Operation ....................................................4-15
NAV Radio Selection and Activation ..........................4-15
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning ....................................4-16
Auto-Tuning the NAV Frequency................................4-18
Marker Beacon Receiver ...........................................4-23
DME Tuning (Optional) .............................................4-24
GTX 33 Mode S Transponder .............................4-25
Transponder Controls ...............................................4-25
Transponder Mode Selection .....................................4-26
Entering a Transponder Code ....................................4-28
IDENT Function .......................................................4-30
Flight ID Reporting ..................................................4-31
Additional Audio Panel Functions ....................4-32
Power-Up ................................................................4-32
Mono/Stereo Headsets .............................................4-32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Speaker ..................................................................4-32
Intercom .................................................................4-33
Passenger Address (PA) System .................................4-35
Clearance Recorder and Player..................................4-35
Split COM ...............................................................4-36
Entertainment Inputs ...............................................4-37
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure ......................4-38
4.7 Abnormal Operation ..........................................4-39
Stuck Microphone....................................................4-39
COM Tuning Failure..................................................4-39
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation ................................4-39
Reversionary Mode ..................................................4-39
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
SECTION 5 GPS NAVIGATION
Introduction ..........................................................5-1
Navigation Map (MFD) ........................................5-2
Dead Reckoning ........................................................5-2
Navigation Map Page.................................................5-4
PFD Inset Map and Windows ............................5-29
Inset Map ...............................................................5-29
PFD Windows ..........................................................5-31
Direct-to-Navigation (MFD) .............................5-32
Selecting a Direct-to Waypoint ..................................5-33
Clearing Vertical Constraints ....................................5-34
Specifying a Course to a Waypoint ............................5-35
Canceling Direct-to Navigation ................................5-36
Direct-to Navigation Shortcuts .................................5-37
Direct-to-Navigation (PFD) ..............................5-40
Airport Information (MFD) ................................5-43
Duplicate Waypoints ................................................5-45
Additional Airport Runway Information......................5-45
Intersection Information (MFD)........................5-47
NDB Information (MFD) .....................................5-48
VOR Information (MFD) .....................................5-49
User Waypoint Information (MFD) ...................5-50
Nearest Airports (MFD)......................................5-54
Nearest Intersections (MFD) .............................5-56
Nearest NDB (MFD) ............................................5-57
Nearest VOR (MFD) ............................................5-58
Nearest User Waypoint (MFD) ..........................5-59
Nearest Airspaces ...............................................5-61
190-00692-00 Rev. B
5.17 Nearest Airports (PFD) .......................................5-64
5.18 Flight Planning (MFD) .......................................5-66
Airways/Jetways ......................................................5-78
Display of Airways on the Flight Plan Page .................5-86
Vertical Navigation (VNV).........................................5-91
Navigating an Example Flight Plan ............................5-98
Parallel Track (PTK) ................................................5-121
5.19 Flight Planning (PFD) ......................................5-124
Operations ............................................................5-124
5.20 Procedures (MFD) .............................................5-130
Leg Types Supported by the G1000..........................5-130
5.21 Procedures (PFD) ..............................................5-142
Operations ............................................................5-142
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
XM Satellite Weather ...........................................6-1
Activating Services.....................................................6-1
Using XM Satellite Weather Products...........................6-3
Weather Softkeys.......................................................6-5
Legend .....................................................................6-6
Setting Up the Weather Data Link Page .....................6-24
Setting Up XM Weather on the Navigation Map .........6-28
Stormscope WX-500 Series II Sensor ...............6-30
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map ..........6-30
Selecting the Stormscope Page .................................6-34
Stormscope Operation with Loss of Heading Input ......6-36
Terrain Proximity ................................................6-37
Requirements ..........................................................6-37
GPS Position and GPS-MSL Altitude ...........................6-37
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data ..............................6-38
Terrain Proximity Page..............................................6-40
Navigation Map Page...............................................6-42
TAWS ..................................................................6-44
Requirements ..........................................................6-44
Computing GPS Altitude for TAWS.............................6-44
Using TAWS ............................................................6-45
TAWS Symbols ........................................................6-49
TAWS Alerts ............................................................6-50
Traffic ...................................................................6-58
Traffic Information Service (TIS).................................6-58
L-3 SKYWATCH Traffic Advisory System .....................6-66
Hazard Displays with Loss of GPS Position .....6-70
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SafeTaxi .................................................................8-1
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision ...........................8-4
8.2 ChartView..............................................................8-7
ChartView Softkeys ....................................................8-7
Terminal Procedures Charts ........................................8-8
Chart Options..........................................................8-18
Day/Night View .......................................................8-23
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date ............8-25
8.3 FliteCharts ...........................................................8-29
FliteCharts Softkeys .................................................8-29
Terminal Procedures Charts ......................................8-30
Chart Options..........................................................8-38
Day/Night View .......................................................8-41
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date............8-43
8.4 XM Radio Entertainment (Optional) ................8-47
XM Satellite Radio Service ........................................8-47
XM Service Activation ..............................................8-48
Using XM Radio ......................................................8-49
8.5 Abnormal Operation ..........................................8-53
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts ..............................................A-1
Alert Level Definitions ................................................A-2
Aircraft Alerts ............................................................A-3
TAWS Alerts ..............................................................A-4
TAWS System Status Annunciations .............................A-5
Other G1000 Aural Alerts ...........................................A-5
G1000 System Message Advisories..............................A-5
SD Card Use ....................................................................B-1
Jeppesen Databases...................................................B-1
Garmin Databases .....................................................B-2
Glossary...........................................................................C-1
Frequently Asked Questions .........................................D-1
General TIS Information ................................................ E-1
Introduction .............................................................. E-1
TIS vs. TAS/TCAS ........................................................ E-1
TIS Limitations .......................................................... E-1
Display Symbols ............................................................. F-1
INDEX
viii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section is designed to provide an overview of the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck as installed in the Piper
PA32 aircraft. This includes the PA32 R-301 (Saratoga II HP) and the PA32 R-301 T (Saratoga II TC), as well as
the PA32-301 FT (Piper 6X) and the PA32-301 XTC (Piper 6XT).
The G1000 system is an integrated flight control system that presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays. The system consists of
the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GDU 1040 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU)
• GMA 1347 Audio System with Integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GDL 69/69A Data Link
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
A top-level G1000 system block diagram is shown in Figure 1-1. The following equipment is also connected
to the G1000 system and interfaces with the GIA 63W:
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Weather Mapping Sensor
• L-3 SKYWATCH® Traffic Advisory System
• S-TEC System Fifty Five X® Autopilot
• Honeywell® KN 63 DME Transceiver
• Honeywell® KR 87 ADF Receiver
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
• GDU 1040 – The GDU 1040 features a 10.4-inch LCD display with 1024 x 768 resolution. The left display
is configured as a PFD and the right display is configured as an MFD. The GDU 1040 links and displays all
functions of the G1000 system during flight. The displays communicate with each other through a High-Speed
Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is also paired via an Ethernet connection with a GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit.
• GIA 63W (2) – Functions as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs with the PFD. Each GIA 63W contains
a GPS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD) and system integration microprocessors.
The GIA 63W also contains a GPS WAAS receiver. Each GIA is paired with a respective GDU 1040 display
through Ethernet. The GIAs are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
• GDC 74A (1) – Processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT probe. This unit provides pressure
altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the G1000 system, and it communicates with the
GIA 63W, GDU 1040, and GRS 77 using an ARINC 429 digital interface. The GDC 74A also interfaces directly
with the GTP 59. The GDC 74A is designed to operate in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM)
airspace.
1-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GEA 71 (1) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIA 63Ws using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GRS 77 (1) – Provides aircraft attitude and heading information via ARINC 429 to both the GDU 1040 and the
GIA 63W. The GRS 77 contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces
with the on-side GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field information, with the GDC 74A to obtain air data, and with
both GIAs to obtain GPS information. AHRS modes of operation are discussed later in this document.
• GMU 44 (1) – Measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the GRS 77 for processing to determine aircraft
magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and communicates with the GRS 77
using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GMA 1347 – The GMA 1347 Audio Panel integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system, and marker
beacon controls. The GMA 1347 also controls manual display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP
button) and is installed between the MFD and the PFD. The GMA 1347 communicates with both GIA 63Ws
using an RS-232 digital interface.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-3
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GTX 33 (1) – The GTX 33 is a solid-state, Mode-S transponder that provides Modes A, C, and S operation.
The GTX 33 is controlled through the PFD and communicates with both GIA 63Ws through an RS-232 digital
interface.
• GDL 69/69A (1) – A satellite radio receiver that provides real-time weather information to the G1000 MFD
(and indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as optional digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69/69A
communicates with the MFD via HSDB connection. A subscription to the XM Satellite Radio service is required
to enable the GDL 69/69A capability.
• GSA 81 (3), and GSM 85A – The GSA 81 servos are used for the automatic control of roll, pitch, and pitch
trim. These units interface with each GIA 63W.
The GSM 85A servo mount is responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 81 servo actuator to the
mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
1-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
High-Speed Data Bus (Ethernet)
PFD
GDU 1040
MFD
GDU 1040
GMA 1347
Audio Panel
Reversionary
Control
Reversionary
Control
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
No. 1 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Inegration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
Glideslope
GPS Output
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
GRS 77
AHRS
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
No. 2 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
Glideslope
GPS Output
GMU 44
Magnetometer
Heading
GTX 33
Transponder
S-TEC System
Fifty-Five X
Autopilot
GEA 71
Engine/Airframe
Unit
Figure 1-1 Basic G1000 System
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-5
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
High-Speed Data Bus (Ethernet)
No. 1 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
L3
Stormscope
Lightning Strike and
Thunderstorm Detection
(optional)
No. 2 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
Honeywell
KR 87
ADF Receiver
(optional)
Honeywell
KN 63
DME Transceiver
GDL 69/69A
Data Link
Real-time Weather
Digital Audio Entertainment
S-TEC System
Fifty Five X
Autopilot
(optional)
L-3
Skywatch
Traffic Avoidance
System
(Optional)
Figure 1-2 Additional G1000 Interfaces
1-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 G1000 CONTROLS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 1347) is described in the CNS & Audio Panel section. The autopilot controls
are described in the S-TEC System Fifty Five X Autopilot manufacturer’s documentation.
The G1000 system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel. The controls for the PFD
and MFD are discussed in the following pages of this section.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
9
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Controls
17
1
NAV VOL / ID Control
10
Direct-to Key
2
NAV Frequency Transfer Key
11
FPL Key
10
14
3
Dual NAV Knob
12
CLR Key (DFLT MAP)
4
13
11
Heading Knob
Dual FMS Knob
15
5
Joystick
14
MENU Key
12
16
6
CRS/BARO Knob
15
PROC Key
7
Dual COM Knob
16
ENTKey
8
COM Frequency Transfer Key
17
Dual ALT Knob
9
COM VOL/SQ Knob
190-00692-00 Rev. B
13
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-7
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD and MFD controls function the same way, except where indicated.
1-8
1
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls the NAV audio level. Press to toggle the Morse code identifier ON and OFF.
Volume level is shown in the field as a percentage.
2
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
3
Dual NAV Knob – Tunes the MHz (large knob) and kHz (small knob) standby frequencies for the NAV
receiver. Press to toggle the tuning cursor (light blue box) between the NAV1 and NAV2 fields.
4
Heading Knob – Turn to manually select a heading on the HSI. When pressed, it synchronizes the heading
bug with the compass lubber line. Selected heading provides the heading reference to the Flight Director
while operating in Heading Select mode.
5
Joystick – Changes the map range (distance top to bottom of map display) when rotated. Activates the map
pointer when pressed.
6
CRS/BARO Knob – The large knob sets the altimeter barometric pressure and the small knob adjusts the
course. The course is only adjustable when the HSI is in VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP mode. Pressing this
knob centers the CDI on the currently selected VOR. Selected course provides course reference to the Flight
Director when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
7
Dual COM Knob – Tunes the MHz (large knob) and kHz (small knob) standby frequencies for the COM
transceiver. Pressing this knob toggles the tuning cursor (light blue box) between the COM1 and COM2
fields.
8
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Pressing and holding
this key for two seconds automatically tunes the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) in the active frequency
field.
9
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio level. Audio volume level is shown in the field as a percentage.
Pressing this knob turns the COM automatic squelch ON and OFF.
10
Direct-to Key – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected
destination (specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or taken from the map pointer
position).
11
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan, or for accessing
stored flight plans.
12
CLR Key (DFLT MAP) – Erases information, cancels an entry, or removes page menus. To display the
Navigation Map Page immediately, press and hold CLR (MFD only).
13
Dual FMS Knob – Used to select the page to be viewed (only on the MFD). The large knob selects a page
group (MAP, WPT, AUX, NRST), while the small knob selects a specific page within the page group. Pressing
the small knob turns the selection cursor ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the
different windows using the small and large knobs. The large knob is used to move the cursor on the page,
while the small knob is used to select individual characters for the highlighted cursor location. When the
G1000 displays a list that is too long for the display screen, a scroll bar appears along the right side of the
display, indicating the availability of additional items within the selected category. Press the small FMS Knob
to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the list.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
14
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional features
or to make setting changes that relate to certain pages.
15
PROC Key – Selects approaches, departures, and arrivals from the flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available
procedures for the departure and/or arrival airport are automatically suggested. If a flight plan is not used,
the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected. This key selects IFR departure procedures
(DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approaches (IAPs) from the database and loads them into the active
flight plan.
16
ENT Key – Accepts a menu selection or data entry. This key is used to approve an operation or complete
data entry. It is also used to confirm selections and information entries.
17
Dual ALT Knob – Sets the selected altitude in the box located above the Altimeter. The large knob selects
the thousands, while the small knob selects the hundreds. Altitude Select is used by the Automatic Flight
Control System in certain modes, in addition to the standard G1000 Altitude Alerter function.
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Figure 1-4 Audio Panel Controls (GMA 1347)
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-9
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
1-10
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receiver is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed, allowing received audio from the #1 Com receiver to be heard. COM2 receiver audio
can be added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 Com receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receiver is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed, allowing received audio from the #2 Com receiver to be heard. COM2 can be deselected
by pressing the COM2 Key, or COM1 can be added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 Com receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Not used.
6
COM3 – Not used.
7
COM 1/2 – Split COM is disabled.
8
TEL – Not used.
9
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected Com transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
10
SPKR – Pressing this key selects and deselects the corresponding cockpit speaker. Com and Nav receiver
audio will be heard on the speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Mutes the currently received Marker Beacon Receiver audio. Unmutes when new marker
beacon audio is received. Also stops play of the Clearance Recorder.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase Marker Beacon Receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to normal.
13
DME – Pressing turns DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 Nav receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Pressing turns on or off the audio from the ADF receiver.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 Nav receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used.
18
MAN SQ – Press to enable manual squelch for the intercom. When active, press the PILOT Knob to
illuminate ‘SQ’. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded audio. Press again to begin playing the previously recorded memory
block. Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key will begin playing the next recorded block. Press the MKR/MUTE
Key to stop play.
20
PILOT – Pressing selects the pilot intercom isolation. Press again to deselect pilot isolation.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
21
COPLT – Pressing selects the copilot intercom isolation. Press again to deselect copilot isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by the ‘VOL’ or ‘SQ’ being
illuminated. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow
squelch adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
Reversionary Mode Button – Pressing manually selects Reversionary Mode.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-11
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS
NOTE: Ensure the G1000 System is powered off before inserting an SD card.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix B for instructions on updating databases.
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the upper right side of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Installing an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the front of the card should be flush with the face of the display bezel).
2) To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
SD Card Slots
Figure 1-5 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
1-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures concerning avionics power
application and emergency power supply operation.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
The G1000 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The G1000 PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test
features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs, and outputs to provide safe operation.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-6. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also
become momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel.
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up, the splash screen (Figure 1-7) displays the following information:
• System version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Copyright
• Terrain database name and version
• Land database name and version
• Aviation database name, version, and effective dates
Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue.
Pressing the ENT Key (or right-most softkey) acknowledges this information, and the Navigation Map Page is
displayed upon pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to
determine a position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 1-6 PFD Initialization
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Figure 1-7 MFD Power-Up Splash Screen
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-13
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.6 SYSTEM OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, it
can be adjusted from the remaining display.
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. Each IAU is
connected to a single display, as shown in Figure 1-1. This allows the units to share information, enabling true system
integration. This section discusses normal and reversionary G1000 display operation, as well as the various AHRS
modes and G1000 System Annunciations.
NORMAL DISPLAY OPERATION
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information).
The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see the GPS Navigation
Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System (EIS; see the EIS
Section).
Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
Figure 1-8 Normal Mode
REVERSIONARY DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE: The G1000 System alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to Appendix A
for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
In the event of a display failure, the G1000 System automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU Ethernet interface to the display is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
1-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-9 Reversionary Mode
If the system fails to detect a display problem, reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing
the Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP button (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for further details).
Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
Pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP
button activates/deactivates
reversionary mode
Figure 1-10 DISPLAY BACKUP Button
AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for specific AHRS alert information.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) performs attitude, heading, and vertical acceleration
calculations for the G1000 System, utilizing GPS, magnetometer, and air data in addition to information
from its internal sensors. Attitude and heading information are updated on the PFD while the AHRS receives
appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor inputs.
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts. Any
failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red
‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-15
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
available
available
unavailable
Magnetometer
AHRS no- AHRS no-Mag/
Mag Mode
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
available
unavailable
available
Airspeed Data
AHRS Normal
Operation
unavailable
available
unavailable
GPS
AHRS
no-GPS
Mode
un
av
ail
ab
le
Attitude/Heading Invalid
Figure 1-11 AHRS Operation
GPS INPUT FAILURE
NOTE: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed
data are available and valid.
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information; however, the
heading output on the PFD is flagged as invalid with a red ‘X’.
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
Failure of the air data input has no affect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS
information. Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and
heading information.
1-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with
the failed data (Figure 1-12 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). Upon G1000 power-up, certain
windows remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All windows should be operational within one
minute of power-up. If any window remains flagged, the G1000 System should be serviced by a Garminauthorized repair facility.
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
GRS 77 AHRS
OR
GMU 44
Magnetometer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Unit
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
Figure 1-12 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
GTX 33 Transponder
OR
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background.
Softkey
On
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
Softkey Names
(Displayed)
Figure 1-13 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-17
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD SOFTKEYS
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and ALERTS softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on
gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to
the previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels. The label changes if messages are
issued.
INSET
OFF
DCLTR (3)
TRAFFIC
TOPO
TERRAIN
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
PFD
DFLTS
WIND
DME
BRG1
BRG2
1-18
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Displays traffic information on Inset Map
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and
elevation scale on Inset Map
Displays terrain information on Inset Map
Displays Stormscope information on Inset Map (optional)
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Inset Map
(optional)
Displays XM lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configurations
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
Displays softkeys to select wind data parameters
OPTN 1 Longitudinal and lateral components
OPTN 2 Total direction and speed
OPTN 3 Total direction with headwind and crosswind speed components
OFF Information not displayed
Displays/removes DME Information Window (optional)
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through:
NAV1 – NAV 1 waypoint frequency or identifier and GPS-derived distance
GPS – GPS waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance
ADF – ADF
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through:
NAV2 – NAV 2 waypoint frequency or identifier and GPS-derived distance
GPS – GPS waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance
ADF – ADF
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Displays softkeys for setting the altimeter and BARO settings to metric units
METERS Displays altimeter in meters
Displays the BARO setting as inches of mercury
IN
HPA Displays the BARO setting as hectopascals
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if HPA softkey is
STD BARO
selected)
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with
OBS
active leg)
Cycles through GPS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation modes on the CDI
CDI
Displays the DME Tuning Window, allowing selection of the DME
DME
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys
XPDR
Selects standby mode (transponder does not reply to any interrogations)
STBY
Selects Mode A (transponder replies to interrogations)
ON
Selects Mode C – altitude reporting mode (transponder replies to identification
ALT
and altitude interrogations)
Allows manual selection of ground mode in certain conditions
GND
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only)
VFR
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
CODE
0 — 7 Use numbers to enter code
IDENT Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen
BKSP Removes numbers entered, one at a time
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
IDENT
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
IDENT
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen
Displays Timer/References Window
TMR/REF
Displays Nearest Airports Window
NRST
ALT UNIT
DME
ALERTS
VOR1
VOR2
GPS
Figure 1-14 Top Level PFD Softkeys
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-19
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DME
ALERTS
STRMSCP
ALERTS
Press the BACK or OFF Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 1-15 INSET Softkeys
DME
ALERTS
DME
ALT UNIT
BRG1 (NAV1)
BRG2 (NAV2)
BRG1 (GPS)
BRG2 (GPS)
BRG1 (OFF)
BRG2 (OFF)
ALERTS
Press the STD BARO or
BACK Softkey to return to
the top-level softkeys
ALERTS
METERS
IN
HPA
ALERTS
Figure 16 PFD Configuration Softkeys
1-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DME
ALERTS
ALERTS
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
ALERTS
Press the IDENT or BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 1-17 Transponder Softkeys
PFD IN REVERSIONARY MODE
In the event of a display failure, the G1000 System automatically switches to reversionary mode. The
following information indicates G1000 data that displays differently in reversionary mode. All other critical
flight data displays in the same format as in normal operating mode and is discussed in other sections of the
System Overview.
ENGINE
LEAN
CYL SLCT
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Displays the LEAN and SYSTEM Softkeys
Displays the CYL SLCT Softkey to facilitate engine leaning
The Cylinder Select Softkey cycles through selection of each
cylinder indicated by changing the cylinder display to light
blue
Displays the DEC FUEL, INC FUEL, and RES FUEL
Softkeys
Decreases gallons remaining by one gallon for each press
Increases gallons remaining by one gallon for each press
Resets fuel used to zero and gallons remaining to full
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-21
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ENGINE
DME
Press the BACK Softkey on any level to return to the default page level.
LEAN
SYSTEM
ENGINE
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
Press the ENGINE Softkey on this level to return to the previous page level.
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
Press the ENGINE Softkey on this level to return to the previous page level.
Figure 1-18 Softkeys in Reversionary Mode
1-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
The MFD softkeys allow controlling and viewing of many functions, including engine instruments, fuel
system data, GPS, comunication, navigation, flight planning, terrain, traffic, and weather. Each softkey
sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to the previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is
visible at all softkey levels. The label changes if messages are issued.
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
ENGINE
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
MAP
TRAFFIC
TOPO
TERRAIN
AIRWAYS
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
DCLTR (3)
SHW CHRT
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Pressing this softkey makes the DEC FUEL, INC FUEL, and
RST FUEL softkeys available
Decreases gallons remaining by one gallon for each press
Increases gallons remaining by one gallon for each press
Pressing the RST FUEL Softkey resets fuel used to zero and
gallons remaining to full
Enables second-level Navigation Map softkeys
Displays traffic information on Navigation Map
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers,
lakes) and elevation scale on Navigation Map
Displays terrain information on Navigation Map
Cycles through choices of airway information
AIRWY ON – Displays all airways
AIRWY LO – Displays low altitude airways only
AIRWY ON – Displays high altitude airways only
Displays/removes Stromscope lightning data
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage information on
Navigation Map (optional feature)
Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map
(optional feature)
Selects desired map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight
plan
When available, displays optional airport and terminal
procedures charts
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-23
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
(optional)
ENGINE
DCLTR
MAP
SHW CHRT
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
TRAFFIC
TOPO
TERRAIN
(optional)
AIRWAYS STRMSCP
(optional)
NEXRAD
(optional)
BACK
XM LTNG
Press the BACK Softkey on this
level to return to the top softkey level.
ENGINE
DEC FUEL INC FUEL
RST FUEL
Press the ENGINE Softkey on this
level to return to the top softkey level.
Figure 1-19 MFD Softkeys
1-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.7 ACCESSING G1000 FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS
The G1000 has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list
allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’ when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in section 1.3. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
Navigating the Page Menu Window:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Window.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
No Options with
NRST Window
Displayed on the
PFD
Options
with FPL
Window
Displayed
Figure 1-20 Page Menu Examples
MFD PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to the GPS Navigation, Hazard Avoidance, and Additional Features sections for details on
specific pages.
The page group and active page title box are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation
Data Box.
Page Group
Active Page Title
Figure 1-21 Page Title Box
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-25
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
In the bottom right corner of the screen, the current page group, number of pages available in the group, and
placement of the current page within the group are indicated.
Page Groups
Pages in Current Group
Selected Page
Figure 1-22 Page Group Icons
The MFD displays information in four main page groups; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob until the desired page group is selected.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the desired page is selected.
There are also several pages (Airport Information and XM Information screens) which are selected first from
within a main page group with the FMS Knobs, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page. In
this case, the page remains set to the selected screen until a different screen softkey is pressed.
Map Pages (MAP)
Navigation Map
Traffic Map
Stormscope®
Weather Data Link
(service optional)
Terrain Proximity/TAWS
Figure 1-23 Map Pages
1-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Waypoint Pages (WPT)
Airport Information screens
- Airport Information
(INFO softkey)
- Departure Information
(DP softkey)
- Arrival Information
(STAR softkey)
- Approach Information
(APR softkey)
- Weather Information
(WX softkey)
Intersection Information
NDB Information
Airport
Information
Screens
VOR Information
User Waypoint Information
Figure 1-24 Waypoint Pages
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)
Trip Planning
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup
XM Satellite screens
- XM Information
(INFO softkey)
XM
Satellite
Screens
- XM Radio
(RADIO softkey)
System Status
Figure 1-25 Auxiliary Pages
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-27
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Nearest Pages (NRST)
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints
Nearest Frequencies
Nearest Airspaces
Figure 1-26 Nearest Pages
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knobs, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by bezel key. In some instances, softkeys
may be used to access the Procedure Pages.
The Flight Plan Pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD. Main pages within this group are selected
by turning the small FMS Knob.
The Procedure pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is
initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading Page is
opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages (note the single page icon in the
lower right corner).
1-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
- Wide View, Narrow View
(VIEW softkey)
Flight Plan Catalog
- Stored Flight Plan (NEW
softkey)
Figure 1-27 Flight Plan Pages
Procedure Pages
(PROC)
Departure Loading
Arrival Loading
Approach Loading
Figure 1-28 Procedure Pages
For some of these pages (Airport Information screens, XM Satellite screens, Procedure Pages), the title of the
page may change while the page icon remains the same.
MFD SYSTEM PAGES
In the Auxiliary (AUX) Page Group, there are two system pages: System Setup (page 5 of 6) and System Status
(page 6 of 6). The System Setup Page allows management of various system parameters, while the System
Status Page displays the status of all G1000 System LRUs.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-29
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETUP PAGE
The System Setup Page allows management of the following system parameters:
• Time display format (local or UTC )
• GPS Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) range
• Displayed measurement units
• COM transceiver channel spacing
• Airspace alerts
• Displayed nearest airports
• Audio alert voice
• MFD Data Bar fields
Selecting the System Setup Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the System Setup Page.
Figure 1-29 System Setup Page
PILOT PROFILES
System settings configured on the System Setup Page may be saved under a pilot profile. The G1000 can
store up to 25 profiles; the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory
available are shown at the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot
profiles may be created, selected, renamed, or deleted.
1-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Creating a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
OR:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-31
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Deleting a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DATE/TIME
The Date/Time Box on the System Setup Page displays the current date and time and allows the pilot
to set the time format (local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC) and offset. The time offset is used to define
current local time. UTC (also called “GMT” or “Zulu”) date and time are calculated directly from the GPS
satellites signals and cannot be changed. When using a local time format, designate the offset by adding or
subtracting the desired number of hours.
Setting the system time format:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time format field in the Date/Time Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired system time format (local 12hr, local 24hr, UTC) and press the
ENT Key.
Setting the current time offset:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time offset field in the Date/Time Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter the time offset and press the ENT Key.
DISPLAY UNITS
The Display Units Box on the System Setup Page allows configuration of the measurement units used for
the following displayed data:
• Nav angle (auto, true)
Affects the BRG field in the PFD Navigation Status Box.
Affects the BRG, DTK, TKE, TRK, and XTK fields in the MFD Navigation Status Box.
When set to ‘AUTO’, magnetic variation is figured into the displayed value. When ‘TRUE’ is selected,
no magnetic variation is calculated and a ‘T’ is displayed next to the value.
• Distance and speed (metric, nautical)
1-32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Affects the DIS field in the PFD Navigation Status Box and the range setting of the Inset Map.
Affects all distance and speed displays on the MFD with the exception of the displayed wind speed
displayed on the Navigation Map Page. Wind speed is affected on the Trip Planning Page.
• Altitude and vertical speed (feet, meters)
Affects the Altitude and Vertical Speed References in the AFCS Status Box on the PFD.
Affects all altitude and elevation displays on the MFD, with the exception of VNAV altitudes on the
Active Flight Plan Page.
• Barometric pressure (inches of mercury, hectopascals)
Affects the altimeter setting on the PFD and the pressure display on the Trip Planning Page.
• Temperature (Celsius, Fahrenheit)
Affects all temperature displays on the PFD.
Affects the temperature display on the Trip Planning Page. Does not affect the Engine Indicating
System display.
• Fuel and fuel flow (pounds, kilograms)
Affects all fuel and fuel flow displays.
• Weight (pounds, kilograms)
Affects aircraft weights on the Weight Planning Page.
• Position (HDDD°MM.MM’, HDDD°MM’SS.S”)
Affects all position displays.
Changing a display unit setting:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Display Units Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select from a list of measurement units and press the ENT Key when the desired
unit is highlighted. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
AIRSPACE ALERTS
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on
or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries
depicted on the MFD Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft
is approaching or near an airspace.
Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned on/off in the Airspace Alerts Box:
• Class B/TMA
• Restricted
• Class C/TCA
• MOA (Military)
• Class D
• Other airspaces
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-33
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For
example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an
alert message will not be generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and
projected to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer
is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
ARRIVAL ALERTS
The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows arrival alerts to be turned on/off and the alert
trigger distance set. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a userspecified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan).
Once the set distance (up to 99.9 units) has been reached, an “Arrival at [waypoint]” message is displayed
in the PFD Navigation Status Box.
Enabling/disabling an arrival alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
1-34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUDIO ALERTS
The Audio Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows the audio alert voice to be set to male or female.
Changing the audio alert voice:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice and press the ENT Key.
MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
The MFD Data Bar Fields Box on the System Setup Page displays the current configuration of the MFD
Navigation Status Box. By default, the Navigation Status Bar is set to display ground speed (GS), distance
to next waypoint (DIS), estimated time en route (ETE), and en route safe altitude (ESA).
Changing the information shown in an MFD Navigation Status Bar field:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list and press the ENT Key when the
desired data selection is highlighted.
The following data may be selected for display in each of the four fields of the Navigation Status Box.
• Bearing (BRG)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• Distance (DIS)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• En Route Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Track (TRK)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Estimated Time En Route (ETE)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
• Ground Speed (GS)
GPS CDI
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to define the range for the on-screen course
deviation indicator (CDI). The range values represent full range deflection for the CDI to either side. The
default setting is ‘AUTO’. At this setting, leaving the departure airport the CDI range is set to 1.0 nm and
gradually ramps up to 2.0 nm beyond 30 nm from the departure airport. The CDI range is set to 2.0
nautical miles during the en route phase of flight. Within 31 nm of the destination airport, the CDI range
gradually ramps down to 1.0 nm (terminal area). During approach operations, the CDI range ramps down
even further to 0.3 nm, or less using angular scaling. This transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the
final approach fix (FAF) and the desired track is within 45 degrees of the IAF to FAF segment.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-35
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If a lower CDI range setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher range settings are not selected
during any phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 nm is selected, the G1000 uses this for en route and terminal
phases and ramps down to the proper scaling during an approach.
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page displays the following:
• Selected CDI range (auto, 2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
• Current system CDI range (2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
Refer to the Course Deviation Indicator discussion in the Flight Instruments section for a more detailed
discussion of CDI scaling.
Changing the CDI range:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the selected field in the GPS CDI Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the range list and press the ENT Key when the desired
selection is highlighted.
COM CONFIGURATION
NOTE: 8.33 kHz VHF communication frequency channel spacing is not approved for use in the United States.
Select the 25.0 kHz channel spacing option for use in the United States.
The COM Configuration Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz
COM frequency channel spacing.
Changing COM channel spacing:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the channel spacing field in the COM Configuration Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing and press the ENT Key.
NEAREST AIRPORTS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that
are not of appropriate surface from being displayed. Default settings are zero feet (or meters) for runway
length and “any” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria (any, hard only, hard/soft, water):
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the runway options (any, hard only, hard/soft, water) and
press the ENT Key when the desired selection is highlighted.
1-36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 99,999 feet) and press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM STATUS PAGE
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check
marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a Piper service center or
Garmin dealer informed.
Figure 1-30 Example System Status Page
The LRU, ARFRM, and DBASE Softkeys on the System Status Page select the list (LRU Info, Airframe,
or Database) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll if all the information cannot appear on the
screen.
The ANN TEST Softkey, when pressed, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-37
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.8 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
The G1000 display and control backlighting can be adjusted either automatically or manually.
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT
The existing instrument panel dimmer bus normally controls the PFD and MFD backlighting as well as the
PFD and MFD bezels, MFD Control Unit, AFCS Control Unit and audio panel key annunciator lighting. When
the dimmer bus is not used by the G1000 system, photocell technology automatically controls backlighting
adjustments. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize display appearance through a broad
range of cockpit lighting conditions.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: The avionics dimming knob may also be used to adjust backlighting. Refer to the POH for details.
NOTE: In normal mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, it can also
be adjusted from the MFD.
NOTE: No other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu Window is displayed.
Backlighting may also be adjusted manually for all of the displays and the associated bezels. The audio panel
key backlighting is directly tied to the PFD key backlighting setting.
Adjusting display backlighting manually:
1) Press the MENU Key on the PFD to display the PFD Setup Menu Window. ‘AUTO’ becomes highlighted to the
right of ‘PFD DSPL’.
Figure 1-31 Manual Display Backlighting Adjustment
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the selection box. Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’, then press the
ENT Key. The intensity value becomes highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired backlighting, then press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ to the right of ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2 and 3.
5) Press the CLR or MENU Key to remove the PFD Setup Menu Window from the display.
1-38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Adjusting key backlighting manually:
1) Press the MENU Key on the PFD to display the PFD Setup Menu Window. ‘AUTO’ becomes highlighted to the
right of ‘PFD DSPL’.
Figure 1-32 Manual Key Lighting Adjustment
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’. Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green
arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ and turn the small FMS Knob to display the selection box.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’, then press the ENT Key. The intensity value becomes highlighted.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired backlighting, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’ and turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green
arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’.
7) Repeat steps 3 to 5.
8) Press the CLR or MENU Key to remove the PFD Setup Menu Window from the display.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
1-39
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
BLANK PAGE
1-40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: In the event that the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer
to the backup instruments.
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with an easyto-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Generic timer
– True airspeed
• Glideslope, Glidepath, and
Vertical Deviation Indicators
– Trend vector
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
– Reference flags
• Horizontal Situation Indicator,
showing
• Wind data
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid
indication
• Altimeter, showing
– Trend vector
– Barometric setting
– Selected Altitude
– Turn Rate Indicator
• System time
• Vertical Navigation indications
– Bearing pointers and
information windows
– DME Information Window
• Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-1
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
22
21
20
19
1
18
17
2
16
15
3
14
4
13
5
12
6
11
7
10
9
8
1
NAV Frequency Box
12 Selected Heading Bug
2
Airspeed Indicator
13 Turn Rate Indicator
3
True Airspeed
14 Barometric Altimeter Setting
4
Current Heading
15 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
5
Current Track Bug
16 Selected Altitude Bug
6
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
17 Altimeter
7
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
18 Selected Altitude
8
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
19 COM Frequency Box
9
Softkeys
20 Navigation Status Box
10 System Time
21 Slip/Skid Indicator
11 Transponder Status Box
22 Attitude Indicator
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
2-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
14
1
13
12
2
11
3
10
4
9
5
8
6
7
1
Traffic Annunciation
8
Flight Plan Window
2
Vspeed Reference
9
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height
3
Selected Heading
10 Annunciation Window
4
Wind Data
11 Selected Course
5
Inset Map
12 Current Vertical Speed
6
DME Information Window
13 Glideslope Indicator
7
Bearing Information Windows
14 Marker Beacon Annunciation
Figure 2-2 Primary Flight Display (Additional Information)
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-3
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for speed criteria and Vspeed values.
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape. The true airspeed
(TAS) is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator.
The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots, while minor
tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals of 5 knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60
knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer
remains black until reaching never-exceed speed (VNE), at which point it turns red.
Airspeed
Trend Vector
Actual Airspeed
Vspeed References
Speed Ranges
Figure 2-4 Red Pointer at VNE
True Airspeed
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator
A color-coded (white, green, yellow, and red) speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors
denote flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE). A red range
is also present for low speed awareness.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line, extending up or down on the airspeed scale, shown to
the right of the color-coded speed range strip. The end of the trend vector corresponds to the predicted airspeed
in 6 seconds if the current rate of acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses VNE, the text of the
actual airspeed readout changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any
data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
2-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, and VY) can be changed and their flags turned on/off from the Timer/References
Window (Figure 2-5). When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of
the airspeed scale. By default, all Vspeed values are reset and all flags turned off when power is cycled.
Changing Vspeeds and turning flags on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired Vspeed.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to change the Vspeed in 1-kt increments (when a speed has been changed from a
default value, an asterisk appears next to the speed).
4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
Figure 2-6 Timer/References Menu
Figure 2-5 Timer/References Window (Model 206)
Turning all Vspeed flags ON/OFF:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) To view all Vspeed flags, highlight ‘All References On’ and press the ENT Key (Figure 2-6).
4) To remove all Vspeed flags, turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘All References Off’ and press the ENT Key.
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Restore Defaults’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-5
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
1
7
2
6
3
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-7 Attitude Indicator
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚.
Red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the horizon are displayed, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚
below the horizon line.
Figure 2-9 Slip/Skid Indication
Nose High
Nose Low
Figure 2-8 Pitch Attitude Warnings
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator moves with the roll pointer and
laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration (slip/skid). One bar displacement from the roll
pointer is equivalent to one ball displacement on a traditional Slip/Skid Indicator.
2-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ALTIMETER
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a rolling number gauge using a
moving tape. Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at
intervals of 20 feet. The current altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape; if the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the corresponding edge of the tape. The metric value, when selected, is displayed in a
separate box above the Selected Altitude.
Setting the Selected Altitude:
Turn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude (large knob for 1000-ft increments, small for 100-ft
increments).
The minimum descent altitude/decision height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected Altitude.
Selected Altitude
Selected Altitude Bug
Altitude Trend Vector
Current Altitude
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height Bug
Barometric Setting
Figure 2-10 Altimeter
Figure 2-11 Altimeter (Metric)
Selected and current altitudes can also be displayed in meters (readouts displayed above the normal readouts
in feet; Figure 2-11). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts (see Figure 2-11).
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in 6 seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown if
altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-7
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft
to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Selecting the Altimeter barometric setting:
Turn the BARO (outer) Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey.
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa; see Figure 2-11).
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI, Figure 2-12) displays the aircraft vertical speed using a non-moving tape
labeled at 1000 and 2000 fpm with minor tick marks every 500 fpm. The current vertical speed is displayed
in the pointer along the tape. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100
fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape
and the rate appears inside the pointer.
A magenta chevron bug is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) for reaching a VNV
Target Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. See the GPS
Navigation Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNV indications on the PFD.
2-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL DEVIATION, GLIDESLOPE, AND GLIDEPATH INDICATORS
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-12) uses a magenta chevron to indicate the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used; the VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the GPS
Navigation Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNV indications on the PFD.
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-13) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a
conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is annunciated.
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting WAAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
L/VNV, LPV) and is generated by the system to reduce pilot workload during approach. When an approach of
this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation source, the Glidepath Indicator (Figure
2-14) appears as a magenta diamond. If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO
GP” is annunciated.
Full-scale deflection (two dots) is 1000 feet.
VNV Target Marker
Altitude
Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Glideslope
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Figure 2-12 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Glidepath
Indicator
Figure 2-13 Glideslope Indicator
Figure 2-14 Glidepath Indicator
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-9
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. The HSI presents heading, turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and navigation source
information in a 360˚ compass-rose format.
The HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) with a course pointer arrow, a To/From arrow, a sliding
deviation bar, and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double line
arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with the
course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
16
15
14
1
2
13
3
4
5
12
6
11
7
10
8
9
To/From Indicator
1
Turn Rate Indicator
9
2
Selected Heading
10 Course Pointer
3
Current Track Bug
11 Heading Bug
4
Lateral Deviation Scale
12 Flight Phase
5
Navigation Source
13 Selected Course
6
Aircraft Symbol
14 Turn Rate/Heading
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Rose
16 Lubber Line
8
Trend Vector
15 Current Heading
Figure 2-15 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI. The current track is represented on the
HSI by a magenta diamond bug. To the upper left of the HSI, the Selected Heading is shown in light blue; the
light blue bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. The Selected Course is shown to the
upper right of the HSI. The color of the Selected Course corresponds to the selected navigation source: magenta
for GPS or green for NAV (VOR, LOC).
Current Track Bug
Current Heading
Selected Heading
Selected Course
Selected Heading Bug
Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading on both PFDs.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
2-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course (for each PFD).
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).
The heading displayed on the HSI and all other navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are
magnetic when the NAV ANGLE is set to ‘Magnetic’ on the AUX - System Setup Page. When ‘True’ is selected,
all navigation angles and the HSI display a ‘T’ next to the angle value (Figure 2-17). When an approach
referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message alerting the pilot
to switch the NAV ANGLE setting to ‘True’ at the appropriate time.
Figure 2-17 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Nav Angle’ in the ‘Display Units’ box (Figure 2-18).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
Figure 2-18 System Setup Page,
Navigation Angle Settings
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-11
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TURN RATE INDICATOR
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than
4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid
(Figure 2-19).
Half-std Turn Rate
Std Turn Rate
Arrow Shown for
Turn Rate > 4 deg/sec
Figure 2-19 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
NOTE: Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
NOTE: Distances in the Bearing Information windows and GPS bearing pointers turn yellow when operating
in Dead Reckoning Mode.
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI by pressing the PFD Softkey
then a BRG Softkey. Use the BRG Softkey to cycle through bearing sources (NAV, GPS, ADF). The pointers
are light blue and are single- (BRG1) or double-lined (BRG2); an icon is shown in the respective information
window to indicate the pointer type. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated
from the CDI by a white ring (shown when bearing pointers are selected but not necessarily visible due to
data unavailability).
When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-20) are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI and show:
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
• Pointer icon (single line for BRG1, double line for BRG2)
• Frequency (NAV, ADF)
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing source
If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency, the bearing pointer is removed from
the HSI and the frequency is replaced with “ILS”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the
frequency is replaced by the station identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source,
the active waypoint identifier is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
2-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Under the following conditions, the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed
in the information window:
• The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station
• GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) Press the BRG Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF.
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
NOTE: Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
The DME Information Window (labeled ‘DME’; see Figure 2-20) is displayed above the BRG1 Information
Window and shows the tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and actual DME distance. When
a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by “–.– – NM”.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
Tuning Mode
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
Distance
DME Information Window
Distance to
Bearing Source
Bearing
Source
No
Waypoint
Selected
Station
Identifier
Pointer
Icon
Pointer
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
Bearing
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
Figure 2-20 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-13
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR
NOTE: The GPS CDI is removed from the display when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
Flight Phase
Navigation Source
Scale
Crosstrack Error
CDI
Figure 2-21 Course Deviation Indicator
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, localizer). Color indicates the current
navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC).
Figure 2-22 Navigation Sources
2-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the light blue tuning box over the
NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the light blue tuning
box over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
LOC1
Selected
GPS
Selected
VOR2
Selected
Pressing the CDI Softkey Cycles
through Navigation Sources
Figure 2-23 Selecting a Navigation Source
The CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI when coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC). When
coupled to GPS, the full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-derived distance. If the CDI exceeds the
maximum deviation on the scale (two dots) while coupled to GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below
the white aircraft symbol.
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the HSI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF; see the GPS Navigation Section) also causes the HSI to switch to LOC navigation source;
GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-15
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI SCALING
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page (Figure 2-24).
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Selected’ in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Figure 2-24 System Setup Page,
GPS CDI Settings
If the selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is
scaled accordingly and the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation. Receiver
Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI scale and corresponding
flight phases.
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-25, Table 2-1).
2-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
31 nm from Destination Airport
Terminal
30 nm from Departure Airport
Departure
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Missed
Approach
Figure 2-25 Automatic CDI Scaling
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- If the next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- If the next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
• Thirty nautical miles from the departure airport (or at the last departure waypoint if farther than 30 nm
from the departure airport), the system automatically selects the enroute phase of flight and changes the
CDI scaling to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm.
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm; if a transition back to enroute flight occurs, the CDI scale increases
back to 2.0 in the same manner.
• During approach operations, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see Figures 2-26 and 2-27). This
transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach
scaling automatically once any portion of the approach procedure becomes active or if Vector-to-Final
(VTF) is selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned within 3° of the final approach segment course and the aircraft position
must be prior to the turn initiation point.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-17
2 nm
FAF
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
angle based
on database
information
course width
2 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
angle set
by system
350 ft
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
1.0 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-26 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
Figure 2-27 Typical LNAV/VNAV and LPV Approach CDI Scaling
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- If the next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- If the next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Annunciation
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-26)
LNAV + V
L/VNAV
LPV
MAPR
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-27)
0.3 nm
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
2-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected (see Figure 2-28).
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating with GPS:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to normal operation.
OBS Course
GPS Selected
Extended
Course Line
Pressing the OBS Softkey
Enables OBS Mode
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS Softkey Again
Returns to Normal Operation
Figure 2-28 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-19
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. ‘SUSP’ appears on the HSI (to the lower right of the aircraft symbol) in place of ‘OBS’ and the
OBS Softkey label changes to SUSP.
SUSP Annunciation
Pressing the SUSP Softkey Suspends
Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
Figure 2-29 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
2-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
NOTE: Pressing the DFLTS Softkey (a second-level PFD softkey) turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset
Map, and wind data.
Some displayed information disappears when pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚. The Altimeter and
Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display and the Bearing
Information and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The following information
is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft experiences unusual
attitudes:
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Traffic Annunciations
• Inset Map
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
– Timer/References
• DME Information Window
– Nearest Airports
• Glideslope, Glidepath, and
Vertical Deviation Indicators
• Wind data
– Flight Plan
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Transponder Status Box
– Alerts
• Selected Altitude
• System Time
– Procedures
• VNAV Target Altitude
• PFD Setup Menu
– DME Tuning
GENERIC TIMER
Figure 2-30 Timer/References Window
The PFD generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the
countdown on the timer reaches zero, the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before
reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset,
the digits are zeroed.
Setting the generic timer:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the time field (hh/mm/ss).
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-21
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
4) With the UP/DN field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.
7) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
8) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
9) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
SYSTEM TIME
The system time is displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Three display formats are available, local
12-hr, local 24-hr, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). Time and date are obtained from the GPS satellites
and cannot be changed, although a time offset may be entered (±HH:MM) for local times.
Figure 2-31 System Time
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor. ‘Time Format’ is highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format.
4) Press the ENT Key to confirm selection. ‘Time Offset’ is highlighted (for local time formats).
5) Enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) for local time formats.
6) Press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
Figure 2-32 System Setup Page,
Date/Time Settings
2-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) by default in the lower left of the PFD
under normal display conditions, or below the true airspeed in reversionary mode.
Normal Display
Reversionary Mode
Figure 2-33 Outside Air Temperature
WIND DATA
Wind direction and speed (relative to the aircraft, based on GPS information) can be displayed in a window
to the upper left of the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or
unavailable, the window shows “NO WIND DATA”. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways:
• Longitudinal and lateral components (Option 1)
• Total wind direction and speed (Option 2)
• Total direction with head and crosswind speed components (Option 3)
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
Figure 2-34 Wind Data
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data below the Selected Heading.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed.
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-23
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RSVI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message (Figure 2-35) and “Vertical track” voice alert. See
the GPS Navigation section for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD according
to the criteria listed in Table 2-2.
Top of Descent Message
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical Deviation
Indicator
Required Vertical
Speed Bug
GPS is Selected
Navigation Source
Enroute Phase
of Flight
Figure 2-35 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
VNV Indication Removed
Criteria
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RSVI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD and not on a descent leg
X
X
X
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
X
X
X
unsupported flight plan leg type (see GPS Navigation Section)
X
X
X
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
X
X
X
Last altitude-constrained waypoint in active flight plan reached
(30 sec before)
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
2-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
G1000 ALERTING SYSTEM
Messages appear in the Alerts Window (in the lower right corner of the PFD; Figure 2-36) when a warning,
caution, advisory alert, or G1000 message advisory occurs. System alert messages are provided to make the
pilot aware of G1000 system problems or status and may not require pilot action. The Alerts Window allows
system alerts to be displayed simultaneously. The FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the alert messages.
The Alerts Window is enabled/disabled by pressing the ALERTS Softkey. If the window is already open when a
new message is generated, pressing the ALERTS Softkey to acknowledge the message causes it to turn gray.
The Annunciation Window appears to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated
annunciation text for aircraft alerts. Text color is based on alert level: warnings appear in red, cautions in
yellow, advisory alerts in white. New alerts, regardless of priority, are displayed at the top of the Annunciation
Window, separated by a white line from acknowledged alerts. Once acknowledged, they are sequenced based
on priority.
Annunciation Window
Alerts Window
Softkey Annunciation
Figure 2-36 G1000 Alerting System
The ALERTS Softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when an alert is issued. The
annunciation flashes and the appropriate aural alert sounds until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. The
softkey then reverts to the ALERTS label, and when selected again opens the Alerts Window to display a
descriptive message of the alert.
Warnings are time-critical and require immediate pilot attention. A flashing WARNING Softkey annunciation
and aural tone (single chime every two seconds) are used to alert the pilot of any warnings. The aural tone
and flashing WARNING annunciator continue until acknowledged by the pilot (by pressing the WARNING
Softkey).
Caution indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require pilot intervention. A
flashing CAUTION Softkey annunciation and single aural tone (one chime) are used to alert the pilot of any
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-25
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
cautions. The flashing CAUTION annunciator continues to flash until acknowledged by the pilot (by pressing
the CAUTION Softkey).
An advisory provides general information to the pilot that may not need immediate attention. A flashing
ADVISORY Softkey annunciation (no aural tone) is used to alert the pilot of any message advisories. The
flashing ADVISORY annunciator continues to flash until acknowledged by the pilot (by pressing the ADVISORY
Softkey).
Figure 2-37 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey labels)
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Outer Marker
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
Altimeter
Figure 2-38 Marker Beacon Annunciations
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
The G1000 System displays traffic symbolically on the Inset Map (PFD), the Navigation Map Page (MFD), and
other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance section and Appendix F for more details about the Traffic
Information Service (TIS). When a Traffic Advisory (TA) is detected, the following automatically occurs:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled, displaying traffic
• A flashing black-on-yellow ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation (Figure 2-39) appears to the top left of the Attitude
Indicator for 5 seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
• A single “TRAFFIC” aural alert is generated, unless an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed
(refer to the applicable TAS documentation for alerts generated by TAS equipment)
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
2-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) annunciations appear on the PFD to the upper left of the
Altimeter (also where the marker beacon annunciations appear). Refer to the Hazard Avoidance section and
Appendix A for information on TAWS alerts and annunciations.
Figure 2-39 Traffic and Example TAWS Annunciations
ALTITUDE ALERTING
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when approaching the Selected
Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is
independent of the installed AFCS. The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter)
changes to black text on a light blue background, flashes for five seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to light blue
text on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and an
aural tone is generated.
Within 1000 feet
Within 200 feet
Deviation of ±200 feet
Figure 2-40 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-27
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
For altitude awareness, a minimum descent altitude/decision height (MDA/DH) can be set in the Timer/
References Window. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the lower left of the Altimeter and with
a bug at the corresponding altitude along the Altimeter (once the altitude is within the range of the tape). The
following visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching the MDA or DH:
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the ‘BARO MIN’ box appears
with the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in light blue once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
• Once the aircraft reaches the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is generated.
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled.
Within 2500 feet
Within 100 feet
Altitude Reached
MDA/DH Bug
MDA/DH Setting
Figure 2-41 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting Visual Annunciations
The MDA/DH may be set from either PFD and is synchronized on both PFDs. The function is reset when the
power is cycled.
Setting the minimum descent altitude/decision height and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Minimums’ field (Figure 2-42).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO. OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS
Knob to highlight the next field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
Figure 2-42 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height
Setting (Timer/References Window)
2-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur; see Figure
2-43 for examples. Refer to the GPS Navigation Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
LOI
WARN
INTEG OK
DR
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Warning–RAIM function detects excessive GPS position errors
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
Figure 2-43 Example HSI Annunciations
Dead Reckoning Mode causes the CDI to be removed from the display (when GPS is the selected navigation
source) and the following items on the PFD to be shown in yellow:
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data (calculated based on GPS information)
• Distances in the Bearing Information windows
• GPS bearing pointers
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
2-29
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
BLANK PAGE
2-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
The G1000 Engine Indication System (EIS) for the Piper PA32 displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, and other
system parameters on the left side of the MFD during normal operations. EIS information can be fully expanded
to an entire page (Engine Page) using the ENGINE Softkey.
In reversionary mode, the displays are re-configured to present PFD symbology together with the EIS Display
(refer to the System Overview for information about reversionary mode). Information on the engine, electrical
system, fuel, and cabin temperature is organized into three displays while the G1000 is in reversionary mode:
• Engine Display – Default display (identical to the EIS Display normally shown on the MFD); shows all critical
engine, fuel, and electrical indicators
• Lean Display – Provides engine leaning information
• System Display – Shows numeric readouts of critical engine, fuel, and electrical indicators
EIS Display
Figure 3-1 MFD (Normally-aspirated)
Instrument types include dial gauges, horizontal and vertical bar indicators, digital readouts, slide bars, and bar
graphs. Green bands indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution and warning,
respectively. White bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the caution or warning ranges.
When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding readouts flash to indicate cautions and warnings.
If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed across the instrument.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
3-1
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 EIS DISPLAY
NOTE: The Fuel Quantity Indicator displays only to 50 gallons per side when full.
The EIS Display shows all critical engine, fuel, and electrical indicators at the left of the MFD. In reversionary
mode, the Engine Display is identical to the EIS Display normally shown on the MFD.
1
3-2
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN IN)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine power
2
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red range
indicates propeller overspeed
3
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each tank, labeled ‘L’ (left)
and ‘R’ (right)
4
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
5
Oil Temperature Indicator Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
(OIL °F)
6
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
7
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Indicator (EGT °F)
Normally-aspirated Aircraft
Displays exhaust gas temperature (EGT) of the hottest cylinder in °F
8
Turbine Inlet Temperature Displays the temperature at the turbine inlet in °F
Indicator (TIT °F)
Turbocharged Aircraft
9
Cylinder Head Temperature Displays the temperature of the hottest cylinder in °F
Indicator (CHT °F)
10
Emergency Battery Voltage Displays voltage for the emergency battery
(EMER BATT)
11
Essential Bus Voltage
(ESS BUS)
Displays voltage for the essential bus
12
Main Alternator Current
(MAIN ALT)
Displays main alternator current in amperes (A)
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range displayed in red
If the main alternator fails, changes to display standby alternator current
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Turbocharged
Normally-aspirated
Figure 3-2 EIS (Engine) Display
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
3-3
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
NOTE: The Fuel Quantity Indicator will display only to 50 gallons per side when full.
The EIS Engine Page displays engine, fuel, fuel calculation, electrical, and cabin temperature information using
round dial gauges, bar indicators, bar graphs, and digital readouts.
Accessing the EIS - Engine Page:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) To return to the previously viewed page, press the ENGINE Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob.
1
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN IN HG)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine power
2
Tachometer
(RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red range
indicates propeller overspeed
3
Engine Temperature Group For each cylinder the head temperatures are displayed in degrees Fahrenheit
(EGT °F, CHT °F, TIT °F) (°F)
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range displayed in red
Normally-aspirated Aircraft – Exhaust gas temperatures (EGT) are displayed
for each cylinder in °F
Turbocharged Aircraft – Turbine inlet temperature is displayed in °F
3-4
4
Electrical Group
(ESS BUS, EMER BATT,
MAIN ALT, STBY ALT,
BATT)
Voltages for the essential bus and emergency battery, along with currents (in
amperes, A) for the main and standby alternators and battery are displayed
using vertical bar indicators and readouts
5
Fuel Calculations Group
(GAL REM, GAL USED,
ENDUR, RANGE NM)
The totalizer-based fuel remaining and fuel used and the totalizer-based
endurance and range calculations are displayed
6
Cabin Temperature Gauge Displays cabin temperature in °F
(CABIN °F)
7
Fuel Quantity Gauges
(L/R FUEL QTY GAL)
Gauges display the amount of fuel in gallons (gal)
8
Oil Temperature/Pressure
Gauge
(OIL °F PSI)
Oil temperature in °F is displayed on the left half of the gauge and pressure
is displayed on the right in pounds per square inch (psi)
9
Fuel Flow Gauge
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
1
2
3
9
8
4
5
7
6
Figure 3-3 Engine Page (Normally-aspirated)
1
2
3
9
8
4
5
7
6
Figure 3-4 Engine Page (Turbocharged)
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
3-5
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
ENGINE TEMPERATURE GROUP
NOTE: Follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the AFM.
NOTE: Turbocharged Piper models are not equipped with the Lean Assist function.
The Temperature Group displays the head (CHT) and exhaust gas (EGT; displayed for normally-aspirated
aircraft only) temperatures in degrees Fahrenheit for each cylinder using bar graphs and digital readouts. For
turbocharged aircraft, Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) is shown on a sliding bar scale.
Cylinder Head Temperature
Exhaust Gas Temperature
(Normally-aspirated)
Turbine Inlet Temperature
(Turbocharged)
Figure 3-5 Engine Temperature Group
Normally-aspirated aircraft have an ASSIST Softkey for access of the Engine Leaning Assist Function.
When the ASSIST Softkey is pressed, the system automatically switches to the first peak obtained and
displays the temperature deviation from peak (∆PEAK) in degrees Fahrenheit beside the EGT readout for the
peaked cylinder. When a cylinder peaks, its number and readout are indicated in light blue and its peak is
represented by a light blue bar on the EGT bar graph.
Lean Assist continues to monitor this cylinder unless the temperature for the cylinder exceeds peak. If peak
is exceeded, Lean Assist is reset.
Selecting the Engine Leaning Assist Function (normally-aspirated aircraft):
From the Lean Display, press the ASSIST Softkey to identify the peak. The number and EGT readout for the
peaked cylinder are indicated in light blue and its deviation from peak temperature is displayed beside the EGT
Bar Graph.
3-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL GROUP
The Electrical Group uses vertical bar indicators to display voltages for the essential bus and emergency battery
and currents for the main and standby alternators and the battery. Standby alternator current is indicated only
when active.
Emergency
Battery
Voltage
Main
Alternator
Current
Standby
Alternator
Current
Essential Bus Voltage
Battery Current
Figure 3-6 Electrical Group
FUEL CALCULATIONS GROUP
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
the fuel was reset.
Fuel used (GAL USED), endurance (ENDUR, HH:MM), and range (RANGE NM) are all calculated based on
the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the fuel flow totalizer. The displayed fuel remaining, for purposes
of these calculations, can be adjusted using the following softkeys:
• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
• RST FUEL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining to the aircraft’s fuel capacity and sets the GAL USED
display to zero
Fuel Remaining
Endurance Calculation
Fuel Used Calculation
Range Calculation
Figure 3-7 Fuel Calculations Group
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
3-7
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.3 EIS DISPLAY IN REVERSIONARY MODE
When the G1000 displays enter reversionary mode, the EIS for the Piper PA32 is separated into three displays:
Engine (identical to the normal EIS Display on the MFD), Lean, and System. For a description of the Engine
Display, refer to Section 3.1. The Lean Display presents temperature information and assistance for engine leaning.
The System Display shows the fuel calculations, cabin temperature, and electrical parameters. All three displays
feature the Engine Manifold Pressure Gauge, Tachometer, and Fuel Quantity and Fuel Flow Indicators.
The Lean and System displays can be accessed while in reversionary mode by pressing the ENGINE Softkey,
followed by the LEAN or SYSTEM Softkey. The Engine Display is shown by default and does not require a
softkey press to be displayed unless another display is currently shown. To return to the Engine Display from the
Lean or System Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
EIS Display
Figure 3-8 Reversionary Mode (Turbocharged)
3-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
LEAN DISPLAY
NOTE: Follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the AFM.
NOTE: Turbocharged Piper models are not equipped with the Lean Assist function.
The EIS Lean Display provides information and a user interface to perform engine leaning. Exhaust gas
(EGT) and head (CHT) temperatures for each cylinder are displayed in bar graph form with a readout for
the temperature of the selected cylinder shown below each graph. By default, the cylinder with the hottest
temperature is selected (number highlighted in light blue) when the LEAN Softkey is pressed. Turbine inlet
temperature (TIT) is shown in place of EGT for turbocharged aircraft.
Bars for cylinders with temperatures in the normal range are shown in white. On the CHT Bar Graph, a
warning condition for a cylinder is indicated in red.
Accessing the EIS Lean Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the LEAN Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
The CYL SLCT Softkey becomes available after pressing the LEAN Softkey. The CYL SLCT Softkey can be
utilized to cycle through the cylinders and obtain information about a cylinder, highlighted in light blue on the
bar graph(s). This softkey is disabled when the ASSIST Softkey is pressed or when a cylinder experiences a
warning (red) condition; this softkey remains disabled until the temperature returns to normal.
Monitoring the desired cylinder’s temperatures:
From the Lean Display, press the CYL SLCT Softkey to cycle through each cylinder and view its temperature
information. The selected cylinder number is highlighted in light blue.
An Engine Leaning Assist Function is available to assist in the leaning process for normally-aspirated aircraft.
When the ASSIST Softkey is pressed, the system automatically switches to the first peak obtained and displays
the temperature deviation from peak (∆PEAK) in degrees Fahrenheit below the EGT readout for the peaked
cylinder. When a cylinder peaks, its number is indicated in light blue and its peak is represented by a light
blue bar on the EGT bar graph. Lean Assist continues to monitor this cylinder unless the temperature for the
cylinder exceeds peak. If peak is exceeded, Lean Assist is reset.
Selecting the Engine Leaning Assist Function (normally-aspirated aircraft):
From the Lean Display, press the ASSIST Softkey to identify the peak. The EGT for the selected cylinder (number
highlighted in light blue) and its deviation from peak temperature are displayed beneath the EGT Bar Graph.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
3-9
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3-10
1
Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine power
Gauge (MAN IN HG)
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range displayed in red
2
Tachometer
(RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red range
indicates propeller overspeed
3
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each tank, labeled ‘L’ (left)
and ‘R’ (right)
4
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
5
Turbine Inlet Temperature Displays the temperature at the turbine inlet in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Indicator (TIT °F)
Turbocharged aircraft
6
Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays exhaust gas temperatures (EGT) for all cylinders in °F; the readout
is for the hottest cylinder
Bar Graph (EGT °F)
Normally-aspirated aircraft
7
Displays head temperatures for all cylinders with a readout for the hottest
Cylinder Head
Temperature Bar Graph cylinder in °F
(CHT °F)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Normally-aspirated
Turbocharged
Figure 3-9 Lean Display (Reversionary Mode)
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
3-11
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM DISPLAY
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
the fuel was reset.
The EIS System Display shows the engine manifold pressure, tachometer, fuel quantity and flow, fuel
calculations, and oil, cabin, and electrical indications. Fuel calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining
(GAL REM) and the fuel flow totalizer. The fuel remaining can be adjusted using the following softkeys:
• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
• RST FUEL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining (GAL REM) relative to the aircraft’s fuel capacity and sets
the displayed fuel used (GAL USED) to zero
3-12
1
Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine power
Gauge (MAN IN)
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range displayed in red
2
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red range
indicates propeller overspeed
3
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each tank, labeled ‘L’ (left)
and ‘R’ (right)
4
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
5
Calculated Fuel Used
(GAL USED)
Displays the calculated amount of fuel used based on the totalizer fuel
flow
6
Calculated Fuel
Remaining
(GAL REM)
Displays the amount of fuel remaining set by the pilot and adjusted for fuel
burn
7
Oil Pressure
(OIL PSI)
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
8
Oil Temperature (OIL °F) Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
9
Cabin Temperature
(CABIN °F)
Displays cabin temperature in °F
10
Battery Current
(BATT)
Displays battery current in amperes (A)
11
Emergency Battery
Voltage (EMER BATT)
Displays voltage for the emergency battery
12
Essential Bus Voltage
(ESS BUS)
Displays voltage for the essential bus
13
Main Alternator Current
(MAIN ALT)
Displays main alternator current in amperes (A)
If the main alternator fails, changes to display standby alternator current
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
From the System Display, press the DEC FUEL or INC FUEL Softkey to adjust the fuel remaining (GAL REM).
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
From the System Display, press the RST FUEL Softkey. This also resets the fuel remaining (GAL REM) to zero.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Normally-aspirated
Turbocharged
Figure 3-10 System Display (Reversionary Mode)
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
3-13
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
BLANK PAGE
3-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in Piper PA32 aircraft is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GMA 1347 Audio Panel
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• GDU 1040 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (2)
The PFD/MFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and reply status (Figure 4-1).
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-1
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PFD/MFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 4-1 PFD/MFD Controls, COM/NAV Frequency Tuning Boxes, and DME Tuning Window (PFD Shown)
4-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
1
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
2
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
3
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
4
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
DME Tuning Window – Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by pressing DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms DME pairing mode and Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, select DME modes, and
Auto-tune entries when DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn
the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the transponder.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-3
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls (GMA 1347)
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
4-4
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Not used in Piper PA32 aircraft.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
6
COM3 – Not used in Piper PA32 aircraft.
7
COM 1/2 – Split COM Key. Allows simultaneous transmission on COM1 and COM2 by the pilot and copilot.
8
TEL – Not used in Piper PA32 aircraft.
9
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
10
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns the optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in Piper PA32 aircraft.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate ‘SQ’. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by the ‘VOL’ or ‘SQ’ being
illuminated. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow
squelch adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
Reversionary Mode Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-5
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: During PA Mode, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color
changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
Top Section of
the Audio Panel
Tuning Box
COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel
Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
4-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
During COM transmission, a white ‘TX’ appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white ‘RX’ appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the PFD and MFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-7
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other
Figure 4-6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
Press for Two Seconds to
Load 121.500 MHz
Figure 4-7 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
4-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest (ARTCC, FSS, WX) Frequencies Page
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window
Figure 4-8 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-9
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-9, 4-10, and 4-11).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
OR:
5) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU (Figure 4-10).
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu.
7) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
8) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
9) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
10) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages PAGE MENU
4-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
On the WPT - Airport Information page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
Press Frequency
Transfer Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Active Tuning Box
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
Runway
Information
Press ENT Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Standby Field. Cursor
then Advances to
Next Frequency.
Figure 4-11 WPT – Airport Information Page
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
Press INFO Softkey for
AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
and FREQUENCIES
Windows
4-11
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
Figure 4-12 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
4-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FREQUENCY SPACING
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
AUX - SYSTEM
SETUP PAGE
Figure 4-14 AUX – System Setup Page
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-13
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
Figure 4-15 Overriding Automatic Squelch
VOLUME
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
COM Volume
Level Remains for
Two Seconds
Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level
4-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey twice selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the CDI
Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either ‘VOR1’ or ‘LOC1’
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either ‘VOR2’ or ‘LOC2’
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Standby
Fields
Active
Fields
Tuning Box
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Pressing
the CDI Softkey
Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-15
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speaker (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the PFD and MFD.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
Figure 4-19 NAV Frequency Tuning
4-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other
Figure 4-20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ‘ID’ appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 with the small
NAV Knob and press the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
The Morse Code Identifier
for the GHM VOR is On
Station
Identifier
Figure 4-21 NAV Radio ID Indication
VOLUME
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Figure 4-22 NAV Volume Levels
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-17
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING THE NAV FREQUENCY
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• NRST – Nearest VOR
• WPT – Airport Information
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest (WX, VOR) Frequencies
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Boxes by highlighting the frequency and
pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-23, 4-24, and 4-25).
Auto-tuning from the MFD:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier.
3) Press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
4-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OR:
6) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU (Figure 4-24).
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu.
8) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
9) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
11) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Figure 4-24 Nearest Pages PAGE MENU
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-19
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the PAGE MENU. The FMS
Knob or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ
Softkey and loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
Press the VOR
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Identifier
Press the FREQ
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Frequency
Figure 4-25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
4-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-21
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode
as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the GPS Navigation Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 active
frequency field. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is transferred to
standby.
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
4-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Outer Marker
Indication
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Keys
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations (Figure 4-27). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker
beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while
marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-23
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
DME TUNING (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The G1000 System tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a
VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing the DME
Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off.
DME
Modes
Figure 4-29 DME Tuning Window
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the DME Tuning Window.
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
4-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER
The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Pressing the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
Pressing the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob. Code entry must be completed with either the softkeys or
the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder softkey inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-25
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
XPDR
IDENT
CODE
IDENT
BACK
ALERTS
Pressing the IDENT or BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
Pressing the IDENT Softkey returns to the top-level softkeys.
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
Figure 4-30 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
GROUND MODE
Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The transponder
powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by pressing any one
of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green ‘GND’ indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of
the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies,
but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by pressing the GND Softkey.
GND
Mode
Figure 4-31 Ground Mode
4-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inoperative.
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
does not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white ‘STBY’
indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes,
these fields appear in green.
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-32 Standby Mode
MANUAL ON MODE
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ‘ON’ indication and transponder
code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-33 ON Mode
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey.
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ‘ALT’ indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-34 Altitude Mode
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-27
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white ‘R’ indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to
Interrogation
Figure 4-35 Reply Indication
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
Entering
a Code
Figure 4-36 Entering a Code
4-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 45 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
Figure 4-37 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
VFR CODE
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code
Figure 4-38 VFR Code
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-29
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends an ID indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The ID return distinguishes
one transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s radar screen. The IDENT Softkey appears on
all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green ‘IDNT’ indication is displayed
in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
After the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
IDNT
Indication
Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
Figure 4-39 IDENT Softkey and Indication
4-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the Timer/References
Window on the PFD. The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering
Flight ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight
ID entry.
Entering a Flight ID:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry.
If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.
Flight ID
PFD Entry
Figure 4-40 Timer/References Window, Entering Flight ID
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-31
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use with the G1000.
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
Figure 4-41 Passenger Address and Speaker Keys
4-32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM
The Audio Panel includes a six-position intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and up to four passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and
aircraft radios.
Figure 4-42 Intercom Controls
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
Passenger Hears
OFF
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, MUSIC 1
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, MUSIC 1
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, copilot, passengers,
MUSIC 2
ON
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot
Copilot,
passengers,
MUSIC 1
Copilot,
passengers,
MUSIC 2
OFF
ON
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot;
passengers, MUSIC 1
Copilot
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, passengers,
MUSIC 2
ON
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passengers;
MUSIC 2
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios and communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot but can
communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios and is
able to communicate with everyone else.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-33
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting. When the MAN SQ
Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic-Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls only the volume
(pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls both
volume and squelch.
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual Squelch
Pilot Volume or Manual
Squelch. Press to switch
between VOL and SQ. Turn
to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Volume Annunciation
Squelch Annunciation
Figure 4-43 Volume/Squelch Control
4-34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. When the PA
Key is selected on the Audio Panel, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished, and the active COM frequency
changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements. The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.
PA Key is Selected on
the Audio Panel
Figure 4-44 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciator turns off
after the present memory block has finished playing.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
Figure 4-45 Play Key
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-35
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPLIT COM
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the
annunciator is extinguished.
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
4-36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
NOTE: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2 inputs cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2
can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2. These inputs
are compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm
stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the
entertainment devices are plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks.
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input MUSIC 1 (see
Table 4-1).
MUSIC 1
MUSIC 1 can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT Annunciators are
extinguished. MUSIC 1 can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated and by
the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
MUSIC 1 MUTING
MUSIC 1 muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. MUSIC 1 is always soft
muted when an interruption occurs from an aircraft radio. Soft muting is the gradual return of MUSIC 1 to
its original volume level. The time required for MUSIC 1 volume to return to normal is between one-half
and four seconds.
MUSIC 1 MUTING ENABLE/DISABLE
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches MUSIC 1 muting on and off. When
switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two beeps
indicate music muting is disabled. MUSIC 1 muting is reset (enabled) during power up.
MUSIC 2
MUSIC 2 can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
XM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT (OPTIONAL)
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to either MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks removes the XM Radio Audio from that input.
For example, if passengers prefer their own music while the pilot listens to the XM Radio, the entertainment
audio should be connected to the MUSIC 2 jack.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-37
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single-pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
After powering up the G1000 System, the following steps will aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as
well as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a
pilot boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
Pilot Volume
or Manual
Squelch
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Squelch
Annunciation
Volume
Annunciation
Figure 4-46 Audio Panel Controls
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify that the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished.
3) Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs clockwise two full turns. This will set the headset audio level to max volume (least
amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT/PASS Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
4-38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
Abnormal operation of the G1000 includes equipment failures of the G1000 components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the pilot of a stuck microphone.
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
Figure 4-47 Stuck Microphone Alert
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-48 COM Tuning Failure
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio will not be available on the speaker.
REVERSIONARY MODE
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects Reversionary Mode for both displays. Reversionary Mode
operation displays flight and engine information on both the PFD and MFD, in case of display failure.
See the System Overview Section for more information on the DISPLAY BACKUP Button.
Figure 4-49 Reversionary Mode Button
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
4-39
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
BLANK PAGE
4-40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
SECTION 5 GPS NAVIGATION
5.1 INTRODUCTION
This section of the Pilot’s Guide provides GPS navigation operating procedures for the G1000 installed in the
Piper PA32. Some prior knowledge of the other sections of the G1000 Pilot’s Guide, especially the “how-to” of
entering data and MFD Page Groups is necessary in order to fully and properly use the information found in this
section. All screenshots are for reference only and are subject to change. This section is organized as follows:
• MFD Navigation Map
• VOR Information
• Nearest User Waypoints
• PFD Inset Map and Windows
• User Waypoint Information
• Nearest Airspaces
• Direct-to Navigation
• Nearest Airports
• Flight Planning
• Airport Information
• Nearest Intersections
• Procedures
• Intersection Information
• Nearest NDBs
• NDB Information
• Nearest VORs
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-1
GPS NAVIGATION
5.2 NAVIGATION MAP (MFD)
WARNING: The basemap (land and water data) must not be used for navigation, only for situational
awareness. Any basemap indication should be compared with other navigation sources.
DEAD RECKONING
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode will only function in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all
other phases, an invalid GPS solution will produce a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the
G1000 will stop navigating in GPS Mode.
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the G1000 detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system will automatically revert to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the
G1000 uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when
available) to calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
DR Mode is indicated on the G1000 by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-1. In addition, ‘DR’ will be prominently displayed, also in yellow, on
the HSI slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-2. Also, the CDI
deviation bar is removed from the display. Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message will
appear on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/WAAS source data will resume automatically once a valid
GPS solution is restored.
Figure 5-1 CDI ‘DR’ Indication on PFD
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G1000 in DR Mode may become
increasingly unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/
or heading data is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking your
estimated position and, consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement
of the aircraft. Estimated position information displayed by the G1000 through DR while there is no heading
and/or airspeed data available should not be used for navigation.
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/WAAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction will compound the relative
inaccuracy of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, the crew must maintain position awareness using
other navigation equipment until GPS-derived position data is restored.
5-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data will be computed based upon an estimated position
and will be displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information. This data
includes the following:
• Navigation Status Box fields except Active Leg, TAS, and DTK
• GPS Bearing Pointer
• Wind data and pointers in the Wind Data Box on the PFD
• Track Bug
• All Bearing Pointer Distances
• Active Flight Plan distances, bearings, and ETE values
Also, while the G1000 is in DR Mode, the autopilot will not couple to GPS, and both TAWS and Terrain
Proximity will be disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and
waypoints) will be questionable. Finally, airspace alerts will continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
Figure 5-2 Symbolic aircraft on the Navigation Map Page and the
Inset Map
.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-3
GPS NAVIGATION
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
This section describes the MFD Navigation Map Page setup and operation which in most cases will be a “onetime” operation since the setup can be customized to accommodate the individual needs of the pilot.
Figure 5-3 Navigation Map Page
(not all map display items shown)
The Navigation Map Page (Figure 5-3) is the first page in the Map Page Group and provides the following
GPS Navigation display capability:
• Map display showing airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, • Heading indication
land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, • Aircraft icon representing present position
etc.) with names
• Icons for enabled map features
• Map pointer information (distance and bearing to
pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent • Track vector
information)
• Topography scale
5-4
• Map range
• Fuel range ring
• Wind direction and speed
• Topography data
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
NAVIGATION MAP SETUP
NOTE: Refer to the appendices for a description of map symbols.
NOTE: MFD Navigation Map operations involving the display of traffic, terrain, and weather data are
described in the Hazard Awareness Section.
Navigation Map setup (which in most cases is a “one-time” operation) customizes display information to
accommodate the individual needs of the pilot and flight plan. The map can be customized using the map
setup option listed in the Navigation Map Page Menu (Figure 5-4; displayed by pressing the MENU Key with
the Navigation Map Page displayed).
Navigation Map
Page Menu
Map Setup
Option
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu
To display the map setup group (Figure 5-5), press the ENT Key with ‘Map Setup’ highlighted. The
following options are displayed (Figure 5-5):
• Map
• Weather (refer to the Hazard Awareness Section)
• Traffic (refer to the Hazard Awareness Section)
• Aviation
• Airways
• Land
Setup
Groups
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Group
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-5
GPS NAVIGATION
MAP GROUP
Figure 5-6 Map Group
Orientation
There are four map orientation selections: North up, Track up, DTK up, and HDG up. The orientation
default setting is ‘North Up’.
• North up fixes the top of the map to a north heading.
• Track up adjusts the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired Track Up (DTK up) fixes the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading Up (HDG up) fixes the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
Changing the map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field. Select the desired orientation and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
5-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Auto Zoom
Necessary Conditions
Auto zoom occurs on all pages on which the following conditions exist:
• Auto zoom is enabled on the system
• No terrain alert condition (caution or warning) exists on the page
• No traffic advisory exists on the page
• A valid waypoint is active by means of an activated direct-to navigation (including OBS mode), or an
activated leg of a loaded flight plan
• The aircraft is in the air
• The map orientation is north up, heading up, track up, or desired track up
Override Conditions
• In the event of a terrain alert condition (caution or warning), the map field of a page allowing auto
zoom and displaying TAWS/TERRAIN data automatically adjusts to the lowest map range in which
the highest priority alert is clearly visible and proceeds to auto zoom when the terrain alert condition
clears.
• In the event of a new traffic advisory alert, the map field of a page allowing auto zoom and capable
of displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the lowest map range in which the traffic
advisory is clearly visible and proceeds to auto zoom when the traffic advisory clears.
• Auto zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob while on any page allowing
auto zoom and remain overridden on all pages allowing auto zoom until at least one of the following
conditions occurs:
• A new waypoint becomes active
• The aircraft transitions from on ground to in air
• The time since the last manual adjustment of the range knob exceeds the non-zero
auto zoom time out value.
• A terrain alert condition occurs or new traffic advisory alert occurs.
Auto Zoom Time Settings
The minimum and maximum look forward times (configurable per airframe and on the Map Setup
page for the ‘Map’ group) determines the minimum and maximum radial distances to display from the
current aircraft position when in north up orientation or from the map center when in heading up,
desired track up, or track up orientations based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
• The maximum look forward time is the basis for which the maximum zoom range necessary to display
the active waypoint, if possible, is determined.
• The minimum look forward time is the basis for which the minimum zoom range necessary to display
the active waypoint, if possible, is determined.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-7
GPS NAVIGATION
• The time out time (configurable on the Map Setup page for the “Map” group) determines the amount of
time that auto zoom is allowed to be overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob unless the
time out value is zero, in which case the override condition never times out.
Final Flight Plan Waypoints
The map adjusts to display any ranges between and including the maximum look forward time (as
described below for “Other Waypoints”) and a default minimum map range of 1.5 nm or 3 km (depending
on system units) when the active waypoint is valid, the final waypoint in the flight plan, and is an airport
or airport runway waypoint. If a direct-to waypoint outside of the active flight plan is activated the new
active waypoint is considered as the final waypoint in the flight plan.
Missed Approach Point Waypoints
The map adjusts to display any ranges between and including a default maximum map range of
2000 nm or 4000 km (depending on system units) and a default minimum map range of 1.5 nm or 3
km (depending on system units) when the active waypoint is valid and is the missed approach point
waypoint.
Other Waypoints
The zoom range is determined based upon the following minimum and maximum look forward time
combinations when the active waypoint is a valid waypoint other than the final flight plan waypoint or
the missed approach point waypoint:
• When the maximum look forward time is greater than the minimum look forward time settings, the
map adjusts to display any zoom ranges between and including the maximum look forward time and
the minimum look forward time.
• When the maximum look forward time is equivalent to the minimum look forward time setting, the
map adjusts to display the minimum look forward time.
• When the maximum look forward time is set to zero, the map adjusts to display any zoom ranges
between and including a default maximum map range of 2000 nm or 4000 km (depending on system
units) and the minimum look forward time.
• When the minimum look forward time is set to zero, the map adjusts to display any zoom ranges
between and including the maximum look forward time and a default minimum map range of 1.5 nm
or 3 km (depending on system units).
When both the minimum and maximum look forward times are set to zero, the map adjusts to display
between and including a default maximum map range of 2000 nm or 4000 km (depending on system
units) and a default minimum map range of 1.5 nm or 3 km (depending on system units). A non-zero
maximum look forward time setting less than the minimum look forward time setting is prevented.
Zoom Range Transitions - Auto Zoom In
The map zooms in as long as the following conditions are true:
• The active waypoint is visible on the map in a lower zoom range or the current zoom range exceeds the
maximum zoom range.
• The current zoom range exceeds the minimum zoom range.
5-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Auto Zoom Out
The map zooms out as long as the following conditions are true:
• The active waypoint is not visible in the current zoom range or the current zoom range is below the
minimum zoom range.
• The current zoom range does not exceed the maximum zoom range
Enabling/disabling automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the small and large FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero-99 minutes) and ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ (zero to 999 minutes).
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-9
GPS NAVIGATION
Land Data
The Navigation Map can display background land data (roads, lakes, borders, etc). The background
land data can also be removed from the display (turned off).
Enabling/disabling land data:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off.’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Track Vector
Track Vector
Figure 5-7 Track Vector
The Navigation Map can display a track vector as a dashed light blue line segment with an arrowhead
attached to the end, extended to a predicted location in 60 seconds along the current aircraft track (Figure
5-7). The track vector is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector look-ahead times are
selectable times (30 sec, 60 sec, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) that determine the length of the track
vector to project from the current aircraft position so that the arrow head is constantly pointing to the
location that the aircraft will be along the current aircraft track in the selected time.
5-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
For example, if a user selects the 60 second track vector look-ahead time on the Map Setup page, the
track vector displayed on the map is the length equivalent to 60 seconds from the current aircraft position
along the current aircraft track.
Enabling/disabling the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘LOOK
AHEAD’ time field. Use the FMS Knobs to select the desired time (30 seconds, 60 seconds, 2 minutes, 5
minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes). Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Wind Vector
The wind vector is displayed in the upper right corner of the map and displays wind direction and
speed (in knots). Wind direction is indicated by an arrow.
Enabling/disabling the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-11
GPS NAVIGATION
Nav Range Ring
Nav Range Ring
Figure 5-8 Nav Range Ring
The Nav Range Ring (Figure 5-8) shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass
card. The range of the Nav Ring is determined by the map range: 125 feet (500 feet map range) to 500
nm (2000 nm map range).
Enabling/disabling the Nav Range Ring:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Topo Data
Topographic data can be enabled or disabled on the Navigation Map using the ‘TOPO DATA’ setting.
The topo data range is the maximum map range on which topo data is displayed.
Enabling/disabling topo data and select a topo data range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
5-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the range field. TOPO ranges are from Off to 2000 nm.
8) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
9) Select the desired range.
10) Press the ENT Key.
Topo Scale
The topo scale setting enables or disables the topography range box located in the lower right corner
of the Navigation Map.
Enabling/disabling the topo range box:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO Range’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Terrain Data
Terrain data can be enabled or disabled on the Navigation Map Page using the ‘TERRAIN DATA’
setting. A data range can also be selected. The data range is the maximum map range that terrain data is
displayed.
Enabling/disabling terrain data and to select a terrain data range:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu. The
cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TERRAIN DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field. TERRAIN ranges
are from Off to 2000 nm.
8) To change the TERRAIN range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
9) Select the desired range.
10) Press the ENT Key. Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-13
GPS NAVIGATION
Obstacle Data
Obstacles
Figure 5-9 Obstacles Data
Obstacle data can be enabled or disabled on the Navigation Map Page using the ‘OBSTACLE DATA’
setting. A data range can also be selected. The data range is the maximum map range that terrain data
is displayed.
Enabling/disabling obstacle data and to select a terrain data range:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu. The
cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘OBSTACLE DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field. OBSTACLE
ranges are from Off to 50 nm.
8) To change the OBSTACLE range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
9) Select the desired range.
10) Press the ENT Key.
11) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
5-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Fuel Range Ring (Fuel RNG) (RSV)
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the flight distance that the aircraft has remaining. A
dashed green circle indicates the transition range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the range
of all fuel, including the reserve fuel. If only reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow
circle.
Enabling/disabling the fuel range ring and select a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. The time indicated is the time the aircraft can fly with remaining fuel on
board.
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
WEATHER GROUP
Refer to the Hazard Awareness Section for information pertaining to the setup and display of the Weather
Group Options.
TRAFFIC GROUP
Refer to the Hazard Awareness Section for information pertaining to the setup and display of the Traffic
Group Options.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-15
GPS NAVIGATION
AVIATION GROUP
Figure 5-10 Aviation Group
• Active Flight Plan (ACTIVE FPL)- The active flight plan zoom range sets the maximum range at which the
active flight plan magenta line is shown on the display (off - 2000 nm).
• Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)- The active flight plan waypoint label size sets the size
at which the active flight plan names appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large). The zoom
range sets the maximum range at which active flight plan waypoints appear on the display (off - 2000
nm).
• Large, Medium, and Small Airports (LARGE APT, MEDIUM APT, SMALL APT) - The airport label size sets
the size at which the large, medium, or small airport names size appear on the display. The zoom range
sets the maximum range at which the airports appear on the display:
• Large: off - 500 nm
• Medium: off - 300 nm
• Small: off - 100 nm
• Safe Taxi (SAFETAXI) - The zoom range sets the maximum range at which taxiways appear on the
display:
• Off - 20 nm
• Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION) - The zoom range sets the maximum range at which runway
extensions appear on the display:
• Off - 100 nm
5-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
• Intersection, Non-Directional Beacon, and VOR Waypoints (INT WAYPOINT, NDB WAYPOINT, VOR
WAYPOINT) - The INT, NDB, and VOR label size sets the maximum range at which the NAVAIDS names
appear on the display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at which the NAVAIDS appear on the
display:
• INT: off - 30 nm
• NDB: off - 30 nm
• VOR: off - 300 nm
• Airspace Boundaries (CLASS B/TMA, CLASS C/TCA, and CLASS D) - The airspace zoom range sets the
maximum range at which the three classes of airspace appear on the display. The zoom range sets the
maximum range at which the airspace boundaries appear on the display:
• CLASS B: off - 500 nm
• CLASS C: off - 500 nm
• CLASS D: off - 300 nm
• “Other” Airspace Boundaries (RESTRICTED, MOA (Military), OTHER AIRSPACE, and TFR (temporary
flight restrictions). The other airspace boundary zoom range sets the maximum range at which restricted,
MOA, and other (training, caution, danger, warning, and alert areas) airspace boundaries are displayed
• RESTRICTED: off - 500 nm
• MOA (MILITARY): off - 500 nm
• OTHER/ADIZ: off - 500 nm
• TFR: (only present when GDL 69 is installed): off - 2000 nm
Selecting an aviation group item text size:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘ACTIVE FPL’ field.
5) Select the desired aviation option.
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected text size.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Selecting an aviation group item range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘ACTIVE FPL’ field.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-17
GPS NAVIGATION
5) Select the desired aviation option.
6) Select the desired range (RNG). Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AIRWAYS GROUP
Figure 5-11 Airways Setup Options
The Airways group manages the display of airways. See the airways section for more information on
using the airways feature.
• Airways - Selects the display of airways:
• OFF (default setting)
• ALL
• LO Only (200 nm default setting)
• HI Only (300 nm default setting)
• LOW ALT AIRWAY - The range sets the maximum range at which low altitude airways appear on the
display.
• LO ALT AIRWAY: 500 ft. - 500 nm
• HI ALT AIRWAY - The range sets the maximum range at which high altitude airways appear on the
display.
• HI ALT AIRWAY: 500 ft. - 500 nm
5-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Airway Line Style
The route of low altitude airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). Note that VFR
sectional charts use light blue for low altitude airways – but on the G1000, that color has the potential to
be confused with airspace boundaries.
Hi Altitude
Airways
Figure 5-12 High Altitude Airways
The route of high altitude airways are drawn in green. This color is used on Jeppesen charts where high
altitude airways are shown on low altitude charts. When both types of airways are selected for display at
the same time, high altitude airways will be drawn on top of low altitude airways.
Low
Altitude
Airways
Hi Altitude
Airways
Figure 5-13 High and Low Altitude Airways
Note that the shade of green used for high altitude airways is darker than any shade used to render
topographical detail such that it should stand out even when TOPO is selected.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-19
GPS NAVIGATION
Airways which are classified in the database as all altitude routes will be drawn as high altitude routes
whenever both route types are selected for display at the same time. Otherwise, these routes will be
drawn in the style (low or high) that has been selected for display. The line drawn for an airway leg
that terminates at a VOR ends where the line intersects with the VOR Compass Rose unless there is an
adjacent waypoint on the airway that is drawn inside the compass rose. Lines drawn for airway legs that
terminate at other symbol types (NDBs or Intersections) end at a point that leaves a small gap between
the line end point and the symbol.
Airway Waypoint Symbols
When airways are drawn on the map, the symbols needed to show the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs
and Intersections) are also drawn regardless of the map setting that would otherwise control the drawing
of that symbol. Labels (Identifiers) for VORs, NDBs and Intersections used on airways will always be
drawn according to the map settings for those items. For example, if airways are enabled to be drawn at
the 200 nm range setting, Intersection symbols will be drawn as needed to depict the airway even though
Intersections are enabled for display only for range settings of 30 nm or less. The intersection identifiers
will be shown for range settings up to 30 nm. Only the intersection symbols will be shown for range
settings greater than 30 nm. When airways are drawn on the MAP, all airway “optional” waypoints are
drawn.
Airway Labels
Airway labels are light gray rectangles with black text (colors will be similar to that used for national
highway labels) and are centered on the airway line. When several airways follow a common waypoint
sequence, the common sequence has multiple labels placed as close together as practical with only the
label border overlapping. To reduce clutter, some airways may not be labled.
5-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
LAND GROUP
Figure 5-14 Land Group
• Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON) - The LAT/LON label size sets the size at which latitude/longitude labels
appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large). The zoom range sets the maximum range at
which LAT/LON waypoints appear on the display (off - 2000 nm).
• Highways, Roads, and Railroads (FREEWAY, LOCAL HWY, LOCAL ROAD, RAILROAD) - The highway
and road zoom range sets the maximum range at which highways, roads, and railroads appear on the
display:
• FREEWAY: off - 800 nm
• NATIONAL HWY: off - 80 nm
• LOCAL HWY: off - 30 nm
• LOCAL ROAD: off - 15 nm
• RAILROAD: off - 30 nm
• Cities and Towns (LARGE CITY, MEDIUM CITY, SMALL CITY) - The cities and town label size sets the
maximum range at which city and town names appear on the display. The zoom range sets the maximum
range at which cities and towns appear on the display:
• LARGE CITY (approximate populations greater than 200,000): off - 1500 nm
• MEDIUM CITY (approximate populations greater than 50,000): off - 200 nm
• SMALL CITY (approximate populations greater than 5,000): off - 50 nm
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-21
GPS NAVIGATION
• States and Provinces, Rivers and Lakes, and User Waypoints (STATE/PROV, RIVER/LAKE, USER
WAYPOINT) - the label range sets the maximum range at which the three categories appear on the
display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at which the three categories appear on the display:
• STATE/PROV: off - 1500 nm
• RIVER/LAKE off - 500 nm
• USER WAYPOINT: off - 300 nm
Selecting a land group item text size:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘LAT/LON’ field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Selecting a land group item range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘LAT/LON’ field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
5-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
NAVIGATION MAP OPERATIONS
SELECTING A MAP RANGE
Map Range
Indicator
Figure 5-15 Map Range Indicator
The Navigation Map’s range has 28 different settings, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range
is indicated in the lower right corner of the Navigation Map Page and represents the top-to-bottom
distance covered by the map. To change the map range turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in
( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+, increasing).
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-23
GPS NAVIGATION
DECLUTTERING THE MAP
The Navigation Map can be quickly “decluttered” by repeatedly pressing the DCLTR Softkey or by using
the Menu Option (Figure 5-16) until the desired detail is displayed.
Declutter Option
Figure 5-16 Map Declutter Option
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Menu Option. Note that during an
instrument approach, automatic decluttering takes place. Table 5-1 lists the features that are turned off at
each declutter level. Note that some of the map features are automatically removed at certain zoom ranges
due to the map setup configuration for each map item. “SUA” listed in the following table stands for Special
Use Airspace. These are controlled airspaces, military zones, etc.
Map Features Always
Displayed
Flight Plan Route Lines
Flight Plan Route
Waypoints
Rivers/Lakes
Topography Data
Terrain Proximity Data
Map Borders
Bearing Line
Lightning Strike Data
(when Stormscope
installed)
Nexrad Data
Traffic Symbols
Traffic Labels
No Declutter
Declutter (-1)
Declutter (-2)
Declutter (-3)
All Map features
visible
River/Lakes Names Only
User Waypoints
Large Airports
Land/Country Text
Latitude/Longitude Grid
Medium Airports
Large City
Medium City
Small City
Not Affected
Freeways
National Highways
VORs
NDBs
Intersections
SUA Group 0
SUA Group 1
SUA Group 2
Small Airports
SUA Group 3
SUA Group 4
Runway Labels
Local Highways
Local Roads
Local Road Labels
Railroads
Major Political
Boundaries
SUA Group 5
SUA Group 6
SUA Group 7
Obstacles
Table 5-1 Map Declutter Levels
5-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
MAP PANNING
Data Fields
Map Arrow
Figure 5-17 Map Panning
Map panning (Figure 5-17) moves the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map range.
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the map pointer flashes on the map
display. A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of
the arrow, the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of
the land at the position of the arrow. When the map arrow crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is
highlighted and airspace information is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name
and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet expressed in Mean Seal Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the map arrow.
2) Move the Joystick in the general direction of the desired destination to place the arrow at the destination
location. When the arrow is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was not
originally displayed on the map). This feature applies to everything displayed on the map except route lines. When
any map feature or object is selected on the map display, features or objects are displayed in the window located
at the top of the display. From here, the pilot can designate the waypoint as the direct-to destination. When the
arrow crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information is displayed at the
top of the display.
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-25
GPS NAVIGATION
Creating user waypoints from the Navigation Map Page:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the Joystick to activate the panning function. The Map Pointer
is displayed at the present aircraft position.
2) After placing the map arrow at the desired position, press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is
displayed with the captured position.
3) Enter a waypoint name.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is highlighted.
5) If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
DISPLAYING TOPOGRAPHIC DATA ON THE MAP
Maximum
elevation of topography
presently displayed onscreen
Minimum
elevation of
topography
presently displayed
on-screen
Aircraft altitude
Range of
topography
elevation presently
displayed on-screen
Ground elevation
at present aircraft
position
Figure 5-18 Topography Scale
The Navigation Map displays various shades of topography land colors representing the rise and fall
of land elevation, similar to aviation sectional charts (Figure 5-18). The Navigation Map can display a
topographic range representing various key points of terrain elevation colors with their associated elevation
values labeled.
Displaying topographic data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TOPO Softkey. Topographic data can also be displayed on the Navigation Map by using the ‘On/Off’
topo data map setup feature. See the Navigation Map Page Setup Menu Section for more information.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topo data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data is removed
from the page, the Jeppesen Nav data is presented on a black background.
5-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
Table 5-19 GPS Navigation Status Box
The Navigation Status Box (Figure 5-19) is displayed in the top center of the MFD and PFD. The MFD
contains four user-configurable fields which can display the information listed below. Instructions on
changing a data field are given in the System Overview Section.
• Bearing to next waypoint (BRG)
• Maximum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• Distance to next waypoint (DIS)
• True Airspeed (TAS)
• Desired track to next waypoint (DTK)
• Track angle error (TKE)
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA)
• Track angle (TRK)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Vertical speed required (VSR)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Cross track error (XTK)
• Ground Speed (GS)
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
Callout Items
Measure Pointer
Figure 5-20 Measuring Bearing and Distance on the MFD Navigation Map
The ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ menu option provides a quick and easy method for determining the bearing
and distance between any two points on the Navigation Map. Pressing the ENT Key at the location selected
with Measure Pointer allows bearing and distance from the newly selected reference to be acquired.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-27
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-21 Measure Bearing/Distance Option
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press in the Joystick or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the page
menu.
6) Press the ENT Key.
Displaying Charts
ChartView and FliteCharts resemble the paper version of Jeppesen and NACO terminal procedures charts. The
charts are displayed in full color with high-resolution. See the Additional Features section for more information
on ChartView and FliteCharts.
Figure 5-22 ‘Show Chart’ Option
5-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
5.3 PFD INSET MAP AND WINDOWS
INSET MAP
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
NOTE: Inset Map operations involving the display of traffic, terrain, and weather data are discussed in the
Hazard Awareness section.
Wind Direction
and Speed
Map Orientation
Active
Navigation
Route
Map Scale
Figure 5-23 PFD Inset Map
The Inset Map can be displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD by pressing the INSET Softkey. Inset Map
features are enabled on the MFD (refer to the Navigation Map Setup Section for details).
The Inset Map Pop-up window can display the following information:
• Moving map
• Active flight plan
• Zoom scale legend
• Track vector
• Orientation
• Wind direction/speed
• Aircraft icon
• Latitude/longitude lines
• Topographic data
• NAV range ring
• Traffic data
• Weather data
• Fuel range ring (reserve; the fuel reserve rings are
enabled and disabled from the MFD only)
• Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• Indication of which map features are enabled
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-29
GPS NAVIGATION
The following Inset Map operations can be performed (operations are performed independently of the
MFD):
• Changing the zoom range
• Changing the declutter level
• Map panning
• Topo
• Traffic
• Terrain
• Stormscope
To change the Inset Map zoom range, turn the Joystick clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease
the range. Zoom ranges from 500 feet to 2,000 nm. To change the declutter level, press the INSET Softkey and
press the DCLTR Softkey to remove background map details until the desired amount of detail is displayed. The
declutter level appears in the Softkey (i.e., DCLTR-1).
Panning the map:
1) Push in the Joystick to display the map pointer. The map can now move beyond its current limits without
adjusting the range.
2) Move the Joystick to pan the map in the general direction of the desired location. When the pointer is placed
on an object, the name of the object is highlighted for approximately 4 seconds (even if the name was not
originally displayed on the map). This feature applies to everything displayed on the map except for route
lines.
3) Push in the Joystick to cancel the panning function and return to the present position on the map.
5-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
PFD WINDOWS
PFD windows are displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. PFD windows can display different types
of information, the discussion in this section of the pilot’s guide is limited to the following windows that pertain
to GPS navigation:
• Nearest Airports
• Direct-to
• Flight Plan
• Procedures
PFD
Window
Location
Figure 5-24 PFD Window Location
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-31
GPS NAVIGATION
5.4 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION (MFD)
The “direct-to” navigation feature provides a quick method of setting a GPS course to a destination waypoint.
Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is cancelled or replaced by a new
destination.
Direct-To Waypoint
Identifier, Facility,
Symbol, City
VNV Altitude
Constraint
Waypoint Along Track
Offset Distance
Inset Map Showing
Direct-To Waypoint
Location
Bearing to Waypoint
from Present Position
Distance to Waypoint
from Present Position
Course to Waypoint
Activate Annunciation
from Present Position
Figure 5-25 MFD Direct to Window
NOTE: The Direct-to Window Inset Map (Figure 5-25) range is adjustable. To change the map range, turn the
joystick to the left to select a lower range, turn it to the right to select a higher range.
NOTE: A vertical navigation direct-to (when part of a flight plan) creates a descent path (and provides
guidance to stay on the path) from the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. All
altitude constraints prior to the direct-to waypoint are removed from the active flight plan upon successful
activation of the vertical direct-to. All altitude constraints following the vertical direct-to waypoint are
retained. See the section on Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of
altitude constraints and offset distances.
5-32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
SELECTING A DIRECT-TO WAYPOINT
Selecting and activating a direct-to destination by entering an identifier:
1) Press the Direct-to (
) Key.
2) Enter the destination waypoint identifier (Figure 5-26).
Figure 5-26 Entering an Identifier
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the identifier. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted (Figure 5-27).
Activate Field
Figure 5-27 Activate Field
4) If no altitude constraint or course is desired, press the ENT Key to activate. To enter an altitude constraint,
proceed to step 5.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field (Figure 5-28).
VNV Altitude
Constraint Field
Figure 5-28 Entering a Direct-to Altitude Constraint
6) Enter the desired altitude.
7) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-33
GPS NAVIGATION
Offset
Distance
Figure 5-29 Entering an Along Track Offset Distance
8) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
9) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
10) Enter the desired distance before (-) or after (+) the along track offset waypoint.
11) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
12) Press the ENT Key to activate.
CLEARING VERTICAL CONSTRAINTS
Figure 5-30 Cancel Direct-to Option
Clearing a vertical constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted (Figure 5-30), press the ENT Key.
5-34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
In addition to selecting a destination by an identifier, the Direct-to Window also allows the selection of
airports, VORs and NDBs by facility or city name (Figure 5-31).
Figure 5-31 Entering a Facility Name
Selecting a direct-to destination by facility or the name of a city:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the waypoint identifier field highlighted.
2) Highlight the facility or city name field.
3) Enter the facility or city location of the desired waypoint. If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility or city
name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS Knob during the selection process.
4) Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate a direct-to.
Any waypoint contained in the flight plan can be selected as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Waypoint
Window when navigating an active flight plan.
SPECIFYING A COURSE TO A WAYPOINT
When navigating a direct-to, the G1000 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Waypoint
Window.
Figure 5-32 Entering a Direct-to Course
Manually selecting a direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course (Figure 5-32).
4) Press the ENT Key twice to begin navigation using the selected destination and course.
5) To reselect a direct course from the present position (or select a new manually defined course) press the
Direct-to Key. Press the ENT Key twice.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-35
GPS NAVIGATION
CANCELING DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 provides navigation guidance to the selected destination until the
direct-to is either replaced with a new direct-to or flight plan, cancelled, or when the G1000 is powered off.
Figure 5-33 Cancel Direct-to Option
Cancelling a direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted (Figure 5-33), press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the
G1000 resumes navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
5-36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION SHORTCUTS
A direct-to can be performed from any page displaying a single waypoint identifier (such as the waypoint
pages for airports and NAVAIDS) by simply pressing the Direct-to Key and the ENT Key. For pages that
display a list of waypoints (e.g., the Nearest Airport Page), the desired waypoint must be highlighted with the
cursor before pressing the Direct-to Key.
Direct-to destinations may also be selected from the Navigation Map Page by panning to the desired destination
location, pressing the Direct-to Key, and then the ENT Key twice. If no airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically created at the location
of the map pointer.
Direct-to Identifier
Bearing and
Distance to
Direct-to Waypoint
Direct-to
Waypoint
displayed on the
Navigation Map
Figure 5-34 Direct-to Navigation Using Map Panning
Selecting a direct-to destination from the Navigation Map Page:
1) From the Navigation Map Page, press the Joystick to display the map pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the map pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the map pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is
highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to navigate to the waypoint (Figure 5-34).
5) Note: if the map pointer is placed on an open location, press the Direct-to Key.
6) Press the ENT Key twice to create a ‘MAPWPT’ waypoint and then navigate to it.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-37
GPS NAVIGATION
DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION SHORTCUTS USING THE FMS KNOB
Select a Direct-to Destination to a Flight Plan Waypoint
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to (
) Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to the left to display a list of flight plan waypoints as shown in Figure 5-37.
Figure 5-35 Flight Plan Waypoint List (MFD)
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press ENT again to activate a Direct-to.
Select a Direct-to Destination to a Nearest Airport
1) Press the Direct-to (
) Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to the left. Initially, a flight plan waypoint list is displayed as in Figure 5-38. The list
is populated only when navigating a flight plan.
Figure 5-36 Nearest Airport List (MFD)
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to the right to display the ‘NRST’ airports to the aircraft’s current position as shown in
Figure 5-38.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired airport.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5-38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
6) Press ENT again to activate a Direct-to.
Select a Direct-to Destination to a Recently Entered Identifier
1) Press the Direct-to (
) Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to the left. Initially, a flight plan waypoint list is displayed as in Figure 5-37. The list
is populated only when navigating a flight plan.
Figure 5-39 Recently Entered Waypoints List (MFD)
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to the right to display the ‘RECENT’ waypoints as shown in Figure 5-37.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired airport.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press ENT again to activate a Direct-to.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-39
GPS NAVIGATION
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION (PFD)
Waypoint Symbol
Identifier
City, State
Facility Name
VNV Altitude
Constraint
Bearing From Waypoint
Along Track
Offset
Distance to Waypoint
Course to Selected Waypoint
Figure 5-38 PFD Direct-to Window
A direct-to waypoint can be selected in the following ways:
• By identifier, waypoint location or facility name
• From a list of waypoints in the active flight plan
• From a list of 25 nearest airports
The PFD Direct-to window is enabled and disabled by pressing the Direct-to Key (
selected waypoint displays the information shown in Figure 5-38.
). The currently
Direct-to Navigation from the PFD:
1) Press the Direct-to Key (
).
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the desired selection field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin selecting the desired identifier, location, etc.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) The cursor is now flashing on ‘ACTIVATE?’. If no altitude constraint or course is desired, press the ENT Key to
activate. To enter an altitude constraint, proceed to step 6.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
Altitude Constraint
Figure 5-39 Entering Altitude Constraint
5-40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired VNV altitude.
Altitude Label
Figure 5-40 Selecting Altitude Mode
8) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
9) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
10) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘VNV’ offset distance field.
Offset Value
Figure 5-41 Entering Offset Value
11) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired target altitude offset from the selected Direct-to.
12) Press the ENT Key to highlight ‘Activate?’ or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘COURSE’ field.
13) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired course to the waypoint.
14) Press the ENT Key to highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’.
15) Press the ENT again to activate the Direct-to.
Selecting a direct-to by city or facility name:
1) Press the Direct-to Key.
2) Highlight the city field (to the right of the identifier) or facility field (directly below the identifier) field.
3) Enter the city (to the right of the identifier field) or the facility (directly below the identifier field).
4) Once the desired city or facility name is displayed, press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-41
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting a direct-to from a list of waypoints in an active flight plan:
1) Press the Direct-to Key.
2) Highlight the FPL field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display a selection window showing all waypoints in the active flight plan.
4) Scroll through the list and highlight the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a direct-to from the nearest airports list:
1) Press the Direct-to Key.
2) Highlight the NRST field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display a selection window showing the 25 nearest airports.
4) Scroll through the list and highlight the desired airport.
5) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a specific course to a waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key.
2) Enter the desired destination waypoint.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘CRS’ field.
5) Enter the desired course.
6) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to using the selected course to the destination.
Clearing vertical constraints:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Direct-to Menu.
2) Select ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ (Figure 5-42). Press the ENT Key.
Figure 5-42 Clear Vertical Constraints Menu Option
5-42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Cancelling a direct-to:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Direct-to Menu.
2) Press the ENT Key to cancel direct-to navigation. If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes navigating
the flight plan along the closest leg of flight.
5.6 AIRPORT INFORMATION (MFD)
Airport
Information
Runway
Information
Communication and
Navigation Frequencies
Figure 5-43 Airport Information Page
Selecting the Airport Information Page (Figure 5-45):
1) Select the WPT Page Group.
2) Select the first rectangular page icon.
3) Press the INFO Softkey or select ‘View Info’ from the Page Menu.
Selecting an airport by identifier, facility name, or city location:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select the identifier, facility name or city location field.
3) Enter the desired identifier, facility name, or city location.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-43
GPS NAVIGATION
The operations listed below can be performed using the Airport Information Page Menu (Figure 5-xx):
• Load Departure
• View Destination Airport
• Load Arrival
• View Recent Airport List
• Load and Activate Approach
• View Info
• Load Approach
• View Departure
• View Departure Airport
Performing an Airport Page Menu operation:
1) Press the MENU Key (on the Airport Information Page).
2) Select the desired option.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 5-44 Airport Information Page Menu
5-44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
DUPLICATE WAYPOINTS
As an identifier, facility name or location is entered, the G1000’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through
the database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. If
duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an entered identifier, a
duplicate waypoint appears once you select the identifier (Figure 5-46).
Figure 5-45 Duplicate Waypoints
ADDITIONAL AIRPORT RUNWAY INFORMATION
Runway Designation
Runway Size
Runway Surface
Runway Lighting
Figure 5-46 Runway Information Box
The Airport Runway Information Box (Figure 5-46) displays runway designations, length, surface type, and
lighting for the selected airport. A map image of the runway layout and surrounding area is also displayed on
the Airport Information Page. The map range is displayed in the lower left corner and is adjustable using the
Joystick. For airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-45
GPS NAVIGATION
Displaying information for each additional runway:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Place the cursor on the runway designation field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the next runway for the selected airport.
4) Select the desired runway.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the airport runway information box:
• Type – Usage type: Public, Military, or Private
• Surface – Runway surface types include: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Lighting – Runway lighting types include: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or Frequency (for
pilot-controlled lighting)
Selecting a Runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Place the cursor on the ‘RUNWAYS’ identifier field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the next runway for the selected airport. Continue turning the small FMS
Knob to select the desired runway.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Creating user waypoints via the Airport Information Page Map:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, push the JOYSTICK to activate the panning function. The target
pointer is displayed at the center of the map.
2) After placing the pointer at the desired position, press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is now
displayed with the captured position.
3) Enter a waypoint name.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is highlighted.
5) If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
5.7 INTERSECTION INFORMATION (MFD)
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
used to define the intersection.
INT Name
and Symbol
Intersection Information
Nearest VOR
Figure 5-47 Intersection Information Page
Selecting an intersection:
1) Select the WPT Page Group.
2) Select the second rectangular page icon which is the Intersection Information Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Enter the name of the identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-47
GPS NAVIGATION
5.8 NDB INFORMATION (MFD)
NDB Name Symbol,
and Location
General
Location
NDB Frequency
Nearest Airport;
identifier, symbol,
bearing, distance
Figure 5-48 NDB Information Page
Selecting a specific NDB:
1) Select the WPT Page Group.
2) Select the third rectangular page icon, the NDB Information Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Highlight the desired selection field (identifier, name, or closest city).
5) Enter an identifier, name, or city.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
An NDB designated as a compass locator (LOM) is a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed
in conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker; when
LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
If duplicate identifiers occur, a Duplicate Waypoints Menu pops up, from which the desired waypoint can
be selected. When scrolling through the closest cites list to select an NDB, a city may appear more than once,
depending on the number of NDBs near it.
5-48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
5.9 VOR INFORMATION (MFD)
VOR Name,
Symbol, and
Location
VOR
Information
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport;
identifier, symbol,
bearing, distance
Figure 5-49 VOR Information Page
Selecting a VOR:
1) Select the WPT Page Group.
2) Select the fourth rectangular page icon, the VOR Information Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Highlight the desired selection field (identifier, name, or closest city).
5) Enter an identifier, name, or city.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-49
GPS NAVIGATION
5.10 USER WAYPOINT INFORMATION (MFD)
User Waypoint
Name and Symbol
Information
Reference
Waypoints
User Waypoint List
Number of
Waypoint Slots
Used/Avaialble
Figure 5-50 User WPT Information Page
User waypoints may be created from the User Waypoint Information Page or the Navigation Map Page. To
create a new user waypoint from the User Waypoint Information Page, enter the name (identifier) and position,
or reference another waypoint by radial and distance.
Creating a new user waypoint:
1) Select the WPT Page Group.
2) Select the fifth rectangular page icon.
3) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Enter a name for the new waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
6) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
7) Highlight the latitude/longitude field or the Reference Waypoints field, depending on how the waypoint is to be
defined.
8) Enter the position coordinates or the radial and distance from the reference waypoint.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
10) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
OR:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the NEW Softkey to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a name for the new waypoint.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the latitude/longitude field or the Reference Waypoints field, depending on how the waypoint is to be
defined.
6) Enter the position coordinates or the radial and distance from the reference waypoint.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Creating user waypoints from the Navigation Map Page:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the Joystick to activate the panning function. The Map Pointer
is displayed at the present aircraft position.
2) After placing the pointer at the desired position, press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is now
displayed with the captured position.
3) Enter a waypoint name.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is highlighted.
5) If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying a user waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Move the cursor to the desired user waypoint in the list at the bottom of the screen.
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired user waypoint.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to make changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-51
GPS NAVIGATION
‘Present Position’ when selected will move the currently selected user waypoint to the present position of the
aircraft. The user waypoint is set to the airplane’s position at the time when the option was selected.
Moving the currently selected user waypoint to the present position of the aircraft:
1) Select the User Waypoint Information Page and press the MENU Key.
2) Ensure the desired user waypoint is selected.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the position and press the ENT Key.
‘Auto Comment’, when selected, will overwrite the currently selected user waypoint comment with an
automatically generated comment. Auto comments are in the same format as comments that are generated for
user waypoints that have no specified user comments. The auto comment can be one of three styles:
• REF1BRG1 / DIS1 - if the user waypoint position is defined by a reference 1 waypoint radial and distance (this
is generally the default case, but the comment could be left blank if there are no reference waypoints near the
user waypoints position.
• REF1BRG1 / REF2BRG2 - if the user waypoint position is defined by a reference 1 waypoint radial and a
reference 2 waypoint radial
• BLANK - if no reference waypoints are near the user waypoints position
Overwriting the currently selected user waypoint’s comment with an automatically generated
comment:
1) Select the desired waypoint on the User Waypoint Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. Select ‘Auto Comment’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
‘Rename User Waypoint’ renames a user waypoint.
Renaming a user waypoint using the options menu
1) Select the User Waypoint Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. Select ‘Rename user Waypoint’.
3) Rename the waypoint. Press the ENT Key.
4) The message ‘Would you like to rename the user waypoint’ is displayed. Select ‘YES’ to rename the new user
waypoint.
5-52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
OR:
1) Select the User Waypoint Information Page.
2) Press the RENAME Key. The name field is blank.
3) Enter the new name.
4) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
5) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
Deleting a user waypoint:
1) Select the User Waypoint Information Page.
2) Press the MENU key to display the User Waypoint Information Page options.
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’ or press the DELETE Softkey.
4) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Would you like to delete the user waypoint’ is displayed.
5) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Select the User Waypoint Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’
4) Press the ENT key. A confirmation windows is displayed.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept ‘YES’ or highlight ‘NO’.
6) Press the ENT Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-53
GPS NAVIGATION
5.11 NEAREST AIRPORTS (MFD)
Airport Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing to
the Airport from
Current Position, and
Distance (up to 25
airports within 200
nm of the current
position)
Airport Name,
Closest City,
Elevation
Length of Longest
Hard Surface Runway
(or soft surface, if no
hard surface runway
exists)
Primary
Communications
Frequency and Type
Most Precise
Approaches
Available
Figure 5-51 Nearest Airports Page
Accessing information for a specific airport:
1) Select the NRST Page Group.
2) Select the first rectangular page icon.
3) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the APT Softkey or press the FMS Knob to place the cursor in
the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ field. The first airport in the nearest airports list is highlighted. If there are no Nearest
Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
4) Highlight the desired airport.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
OR:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Select the option ‘Select Airport Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’
field.
3) Highlight the desired airport.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-54
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Accessing runway information for the selected airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ field.
2) Select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
OR:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Select the option ‘Select Runway Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’
field.
3) Select the desired runway.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-55
GPS NAVIGATION
5.12 NEAREST INTERSECTIONS (MFD)
Intersection
Identifier, Symbol,
Bearing, Distance
(within 200 nm of
current position)
Map of
Surrounding Area
Latitude and
Longitude
Figure 5-52 Nearest Intersections Page
Reference VOR
Name,
Symbol, Frequency,
Bearing, Distance
Selecting a nearest intersection:
1) Select the NRST Page Group.
2) Select the Nearest Intersections Page, the second page in the group.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Select the desired intersection. The information on the Nearest Intersection Page pertains to the selected
intersection.
5-56
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
5.13 NEAREST NDB (MFD)
NDB Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing,
Distance (within
200 nm of current
position)
Map of
Surrounding Area
NDB Information
Figure 5-53 Nearest NDB Page
Reference VOR
Name,
Symbol, Frequency,
Bearing, Distance
Selecting a nearest NDB:
1) Select the NRST Page Group.
2) Select the Nearest NDB Page, the third page in the group.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Select the desired NDB. The information on the Nearest NDB Page pertains to the selected NDB.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-57
GPS NAVIGATION
5.14 NEAREST VOR (MFD)
VOR Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing,
Distance (within
200 nm of current
position)
Map of
Surrounding Area
Reference VOR
Name,
Closest City, Type,
Mag Variation,
Position
Figure 5-54 Nearest VOR Page
Selected VOR
Frequency
Selecting a nearest VOR:
1) Select the NRST Page Group.
2) Select the fourth rectangular page icon, the Nearest VOR Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired nearest VOR.
OR:
1) Press the VOR Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘NEAREST VOR’ window.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select a VOR.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-58
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
5.15 NEAREST USER WAYPOINT (MFD)
Nearest User
Waypoint
Name, Symbol,
Bearing,
Distance
User Waypoint
Information
Reference
Waypoints
Figure 5-55 Nearest User Waypoint Page
The User Waypoints Page (Figure 5-38) displays a list of up to the 25 nearest user waypoints that are within 200
nm of the aircraft’s present position. Each list item includes the identifier, icon, bearing, and distance to the user
waypoint from the current position. An arrow before the identifier indicates the selected user waypoint. Up to
eleven user waypoints are visible at a time. If more than eleven are available, a scroll bar is available. If there are
no user waypoints in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest user waypoints is displayed.
Information about the selected user waypoint includes the user comment and location (latitude and longitude).
Reference waypoints for the selected user waypoint are those specified when the user waypoint was created. If
there is only one valid reference waypoint, the bearing and distance from the reference waypoint is stated and the
second reference waypoint information is dashed. If there are no user waypoints or no valid reference waypoints,
the reference waypoint fields are dashed. If there are two valid reference waypoints, the bearings from the
reference waypoints are stated and the first reference waypoint’s distance field is dashed.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-59
GPS NAVIGATION
A map of the currently selected user waypoint and surrounding data is displayed which at a minimum shows
the selected user waypoint and the current aircraft position. A line is drawn between the current position and the
selected user waypoint.
Selecting a nearest user waypoint:
1) Select the NRST page group.
2) Select the fifth rectangular page icon, the Nearest User Waypoints Page.
3) With the Nearest User Waypoint Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor. If any previously
entered User Waypoints are within 200 nm, these will be displayed with the closest waypoint listed first.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired waypoint. The remaining information on the Nearest User Waypoint
Page pertains to the selected Nearest User Waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-60
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
5.16 NEAREST AIRSPACES
The G1000 alerts the pilot to as many as nine controlled or special use airspaces (up to three at one time) near
or in the flight path. The airspace name, class, controlling agency, vertical limits, and associated frequencies are
displayed for the selected airspace.
Airspace Alerts
Note: At most, three
airspace alerts are
shown at any given time
Airspace Type
and Controlling
Agency
The Ceiling and
Floor Altitudes
(vertical limits)
Associated
Frequencies for
the Currently
Selected Airspace
Alert
Figure 5-56 Nearest Airspaces Page
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert and associated information:
1) Select the Nearest Airspace Page by selecting the NRST Page Group and then select the seventh page in the
group.
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box (Figure 5-56).
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-61
GPS NAVIGATION
OR:
1) With the Nearest Airspace Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
4) Select the desired airspace.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
OR:
1) With the Nearest Airspace Page displayed, press the FMS Knob. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’
Box.
2) Select the desired airspace.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Once an airspace alert has been selected, associated information concerning the specific airspace is provided.
The information includes Airspace Name, Status, and Time to Entry. The status and time to entry (if applicable)
are based on the following conditions:
• If the projected course will take the aircraft inside an airspace within the next ten minutes, the status field shows
the airspace as ‘Ahead’.
• If the aircraft is within 2 nm of an airspace and the current course will take the aircraft inside, the status field
shows the airspace as ‘Ahead < 2 nm’.
• If the aircraft is within 2 nm of an airspace and the current course will not take the aircraft inside, the status field
shows ‘Within 2 nm’.
• If the aircraft has entered an airspace, the status field shows ‘Inside’.
The airspace alerts are based on three-dimensional data (latitude, longitude, and altitude) to avoid nuisance
alerts. The alert boundaries for controlled airspace are also sectored to provide complete information on any
nearby airspace. Once the described conditions exists, the status and time of entry is shown if the airspace alert
messages are enabled on the System Setup Page (Auxiliary Page Group; see the System Overview Section).
At most three airspace alerts are displayed at any given time. The user can change the airspace alerts that are
currently visible. For each airspace alert the name of the airspace, the proximity status (Inside, Ahead < 2nm,
Ahead, Within 2nm), and the time until the current path of the aircraft will intercept the airspace (only when
the airspace is Ahead, or Ahead < 2nm, otherwise “__:__:__” is used) is displayed. If there are more than three
airspace alerts they are displayed in a scrollable list box with only three visible at one time.
All airspace alerts, except for prohibited areas, may be turned on or off from the System Setup Page. An
altitude buffer is also provided on the System Setup Page to provide an extra margin of safety above or below the
published limits. See the System Overview Section for additional details.
5-62
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
The following types of airspaces (information shown in the Airspace Agency Box, Figure 5-46) are on the
Nearest Airspaces Page:
• Class C, ICAO terminal control area, Terminal radar
service area (TRSA), Mode C area, and Military
operations area (MOA)
• ICAO control area
• Mode C tower area
• Alert area
• Danger area
• Military operations area (MOA), Warning area, Alert
area, Caution area, Danger area, Prohibited area,
Restricted area, Training area, and Unknown area
• Prohibited area
• Class B airspaces
• Restricted area
• Class C airspaces
• Training area
• Class D airspaces
• Unknown area
• MOA airspaces
• Caution area
• Warning area
The Vertical Limits Box displays the floor and ceiling limits of the airspace alert. The following are examples of
what may appear as vertical limits for an airspace:
• 5000 ft MSL (5,000 feet mean sea level)
• 5000 ft AGL (5,000 feet above ground level)
• MSL (at mean sea level)
• NOTAM (see Notice to Airmen)
• Unknown
• Unlimited
• See Chart
• Surface
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-63
GPS NAVIGATION
5.17 NEAREST AIRPORTS (PFD)
The Nearest Airports window on the PFD displays the 25 nearest airports along with the information shown in
Figure 5-57. From the Nearest Airports Window, information for a selected airport can be viewed, the active
primary communications frequency can be selected, and direct-to navigation can be activated.
Airport Symbol
Distance From
Nearest Airport
Identifier
Best Approach
Available
Primary COM
Frequency
Bearing
To Nearest
Airport
Figure 5-57 Nearest Airports Window
Length of Longest Hard
Surface Runway
(or soft surface if no hard
runway exists)
Airport Symbol
City, State
Airport Identifier
Facility Name
Airport Usage Type
Elevation
Region
Fuel Types Available
(AV Gas, Jet)
Position Field
UTC Time
Figure 5-58 Airport Information Window
5-64
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Viewing information about an airport:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to display a list of the nearest airports.
2) Select the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) The airport information is displayed with ‘BACK’ highlighted at the bottom of the window (Figure 5-59).
5) When finished viewing the airport information, press the ENT Key to return to the nearest airports list.
Activating a direct-to:
From the Nearest Airports Window, highlight the desired airport, then press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window
appears. Press the ENT Key twice to activate.
Airport Symbol
Airport Identifier
City, State
Facility Name
Altitude Constraint
Along Track Offset Distance
Bearing to Direct-to
Waypoint
Distance to Direct-to Waypoint
Direct-to Course
Figure 5-59 PFD Direct-to Window
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-65
GPS NAVIGATION
5.18 FLIGHT PLANNING (MFD)
This section describes the extensive capability of the G1000 as it pertains to flight plans and flight planning,
airways, and vertical navigation.
Creating a new stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page (Figure 5-60).
Figure 5-60 Flight Plan Catalog Page
3) Press the NEW Softkey. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed with a blank field for the first empty storage
location (Figure 5-61).
5-66
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-61 Stored Flight Plan Page
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint, or select a waypoint from the list of most
recently entered waypoints.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Enter the identifier for each additional flight plan waypoint.
7) Once all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to store the flight plan and return to the Flight Plan
Catalog Page.
OR:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’ (Figure 5-xx).
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-67
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-62 Create Flight Plan Menu Option
5) Press the ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed, with a blank flight plan for the first empty storage
location.
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint and press the ENT Key, or select a waypoint
from the list of recently entered waypoints.
7) Enter the identifier for each additional flight plan waypoint.
8) Once all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to store the flight plan and return to the Flight Plan
Catalog Page.
Viewing a stored flight plan:
1) Select the Flight Plan Catalog Page and press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan from the list.
3) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan (Figure 5-63).
5-68
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-63 Flight Plan Information
4) Press the ENT Key or the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight
plan (Figure 5-64).
Figure 5-64 Viewing Flight Plan Waypoints
5) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing the active flight plan:
Press the FPL Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-69
GPS NAVIGATION
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the EDIT Softkey. The Stored Flight Plan page opens.
4) To add a waypoint to the flight plan, select the point in the plan where the new waypoint is to be added. If an
existing waypoint is highlighted, the new waypoint is placed directly in front of this waypoint.
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city of the new waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
OR:
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan page opens.
4) To add a waypoint to the flight plan, select the point in the plan where the new waypoint is to be added. If an
existing waypoint is highlighted, the new waypoint is placed directly in front of this waypoint.
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city of the new waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
Removing individual waypoints from the flight plan (except waypoints in the final approach
segment):
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, select the waypoint that is to be deleted.
2) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the waypoint (Figure 5-65).
Figure 5-65 Confirmation Window
5-70
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Switching waypoint data between leg-to-leg waypoint information and cumulative waypoint
information:
1) Select the FPL Key.
2) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint information or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-toleg waypoint information.
Switching views between wide and narrow to show more or less leg data:
1) Select the FPL Key.
2) Press the WIDE Softkey to view additional leg data or press the NARROW Softkey to less leg data.
Figure 5-66 Flight Plan Wide View
Changing the flight plan name, comment:
1) Press the FMS Knob from the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Highlight the flight plan title field.
3) Use the FMS Knob to change/edit the title (Figure 5-67).
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-71
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-67 Changing Flight Plan Title
4) Press the ENT Key.
‘Activate Leg’ selects the highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently used for
navigation guidance).
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, highlight the desired destination waypoint.
2) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. An ‘Activate’ window is displayed (Figure 5-68).
Figure 5-68 Activate Window
5-72
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
3) With ‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
OR:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Window, highlight the desired destination waypoint.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Activate Leg’ (Figure 5-69).
Figure 5-69 Activate Leg Menu Option
4) Press the ENT Key. An ‘Activate’ window is displayed.
5) With ‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument procedure
the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument procedure
is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, departure, or arrival. The active flight plan is erased when
the system is turned off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with
an approach, departure or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define
the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the
procedure has not been modified. If an approach, departure or arrival procedure is no longer available, the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan and an alert is displayed.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-73
GPS NAVIGATION
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
Figure 5-70 Storing a Flight Plan
After navigating along a flight plan, the route can be reversed for navigation guidance back to the original
departure waypoint.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Highlight desired flight plan.
4) Press the INVERT Softkey from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The ‘Invert and Activate stored flight plan?’
Window is displayed.
5-74
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-71 Invert and Activate a Flight Plan
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
OR:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Highlight the desired flight plan.
5) Press the MENU Key.
6) Highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL’.
7) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
8) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-75
GPS NAVIGATION
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes from a reference
waypoint. It can also be used to create a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen
reference waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU.
2) Select ‘Closest Point of FPL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A window is displayed with the reference waypoint field highlighted.
4) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) The G1000 displays the location, lat/lon, bearing (BRG), and distance (DIST) to the closest point along the flight
plan from the selected reference waypoint. To create a user waypoint at this location and add it to the flight
plan, highlight ‘LOAD’ and press the ENT Key. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier
of the reference waypoint.
Copying a stored flight plan into another storage slot:
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Copy to flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT Key.
OR:
1) From the Flight Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the COPY Softkey. A ‘Copy to flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT Key.
The ‘Sort by Comment’ menu option sorts flight plans alphanumerically based upon the comment assigned to
each flight plan.
Sorting by comment (flight plan name):
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Sort By Comment’ and press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
3) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key to change flight plan ordering. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
5-76
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Deleting a flight plan:
1) Highlight the desired destination waypoint.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. A confirmation window is displayed.
3) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Highlight the flight plan to delete.
5) Press the MENU Key.
6) Highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
7) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
8) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT Key.
OR:
1) Highlight the desired flight plan to delete.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. A confirmation window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
OR:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT Key:
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-77
GPS NAVIGATION
AIRWAYS/JETWAYS
NOTE: Refer to the Navigation Map Page setup section for details on how to customize the display of
airways on the MFD.
Airways (called Low Altitude Airways in the G1000 and in this pilot’s guide) serve primarily smaller pistonengine, propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower altitudes. Airways start at 1,200 feet above
ground level (AGL) and extend upward to an altitude of 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Airways are 8
nautical miles wide. Airways are called “Victor” airways, because they run primarily between VORs, and the
phonetic alphabet’s term for “V” is Victor. Airways have names like V222 or V37.
HIGH ALTITUDE AIRWAYS (JETWAYS)
Jetways (called High Altitude Airways in the G1000 and in this pilot’s guide) are actually called jet routes,
and serve primarily airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston aircraft operating over longer distances
above altitudes of 18,000 feet. Jet routes start at 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL) and extend upward to an
altitude of 45,000 feet MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450
for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet routes have names like J42 or J121.
NOTE: Airways are not selectable for display on the PFD Inset Map. The window is too small to be useful for
this purpose.
DISPLAYING AIRWAYS ON THE MFD/MAP
The AIRWAYS Softkey allows the display of airways to be turned on or off. The softkey takes on one of
four conditions to allow high and low altitude airways to be displayed in any combination.
MAP
TRAFFIC
TOPO
TERRAIN AIRWAYS
BACK
AIRWY ON
ALL AIRWAYS ARE SELECTED
AIRWY LO
ONLY LOW ALTITUDE AIRWAYS ARE SELECTED
AIRWY HI
ONLY HIGH ALTITUDE AIRWAYS ARE SELECTED
In addition, an Airways group is a part of the MAP SETUP which allows an alternate method of selecting
airways for the display as well as adjustment of maximum ranges for which high altitude and low altitude
airways will be shown. See the Map Setup section for more details.
5-78
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
After selecting the desired airway for display, it can be loaded into a flight plan. Loading an airway into a flight
plan is done in six steps as follows:.
1.
Select the airway insertion point on the original flight plan
2.
Access the Airway Loading Page
3.
Select an airway from a list
4.
Select an exit waypoint from a list
5.
Preview the sequence of waypoints
6.
Load the selected airway segment into the flight plan
Select the airway insertion point on the original flight plan:
Move the cursor to the spot after the desired airway entry waypoint. In the example given in Figure 5-72, the pilot
wants to join an airway after ANX, so the cursor is moved to the line just beyond ANX (which is over waypoint
FRANC).
Figure 5-72 Airway Insertion Point
Access the Airway Loading Page:
Press the MENU Key and select “Load Airway” from the Flight Plan Page Menu (Figure 5-72).
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-79
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-73 Load Airway Menu Option
Note: the “Load Airway” menu item will be selectable only when an acceptable airway entry waypoint has been
indicated (the waypoint ahead of the cursor position). Thus the “Load Airway” menu item will be greyed-out
in the following instances:
•
An airway entry waypoint has not been established (there is no waypoint ahead of the cursor position)
•
The airway entry waypoint is on an arrival or an approach procedure (it is OK if the airway insertion point is on
a departure or an airway)
•
There are no selectable airways in the database starting from the airway entry waypoint.
Select an Airway from the list:
Use the FMS Knob and the ENT Key to select one of the airways from the list (V12 in this example).
Whenever the Airway Loading Page is accessed, it is initialized to select the airway from the list of airways
available from the selected airway entry point. In the example, there are seven airways selectable given the
entry waypoint (ANX). The Airway Loading page will select an airway and exit waypoint based on the
waypoints that are already in the flight plan.
5-80
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-74 Selecting an Airway
The Airway Loading Page provides the list of the airways that are selectable from the airway entry waypoint.
The list of airways is sorted such that low altitude airways are presented at the top of the list, followed by “all”
altitude airways, followed by high altitude airways. In this example, only low altitude airways are available
at ANX.
On the airway list, the cursor is placed initially over an airway identifier selected by the system as follows:
• The system will compare the list of airways selectable at the airway entry waypoint with the airways
connecting with subsequent waypoints in the flight plan up to and including the first waypoint of the arrival
or approach. If common airways exist, the airway that connects to the last waypoint in the flight plan will be
nominated.
• Otherwise, the cursor will be positioned over the first airway on the list.
In the example, V12 is auto-selected because COU is the last waypoint in the flight plan on an airway that
is selectable from ANX (V12). If we were loading the airway from FRANC we get the same result (V12-COU).
If we were loading the airway from COU, V44 would be nominated because V44 (which is selectable from
COU but not from ANX or FRANC) connects to the first waypoint in the arrival (ENL).
Select an exit waypoint from a list:
The Airway Loading Window goes to this step immediately after the airway has been selected.
The Airway Loading Window provides a list of the available airway exit waypoints.
On the airway exit waypoint list, the cursor is placed initially over a waypoint nominated by the system.
Auto-selection of an exit waypoint is similar to the process of auto-selecting an airway (based on connecting
with a waypoint later in the flight plan) except that the choice of airway is now constrained.
The list of airway exit waypoints is presented such that the waypoint nominated by the system is displayed
below the selected entry waypoint (this could be opposite of the order that the waypoints occur in the
database).
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-81
GPS NAVIGATION
If there is no connecting waypoint that can be nominated based on the existing flight plan, the system will
try to present the list of airway waypoints in the order most consistent with the direction of the existing flight
plan and will nominate the next airway waypoint after the entry waypoint.
If the list of waypoints is large enough that the list box will need to be scrolled, the list box will be initially
arranged such that the waypoint nominated by the system is as near the middle of the scroll box as practical
(this allows the pilot to see adjacent waypoints on both sides of the nominated waypoint).
The entry waypoint is also shown on the list of exit waypoints but is not selectable.
Figure 5-75 Selecting an Exit Waypoint
In the example, airway V12 has 92 selectable waypoints on the segment that includes ANX, FRANC and
COU. The list box is initialized to show 19 of those waypoints centered on COU which is the waypoint
initially nominated by the system.
Preview the sequence of waypoints:
In MFD display mode, the airway segment will be previewed during the course of selecting the exit
waypoint. The preview consists of a graphical preview of the selected airway segment presented in the map
display window as well as a text listing of the waypoint sequence with courses and distances shown in the
Airway Loading window. The preview will update as the cursor is moved up or down over the list of exit
waypoints. In this example, the pilot has moved the cursor down from COU to TOY which updates the
graphical preview:
5-82
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-76 Previewing the Waypoint Sequence
The pilot uses the FMS Knob and the ENT Key to select an exit waypoint from the list (TOY in this
example).
After the exit waypoint is selected, the pilot gets one last chance to preview the waypoint sequence. If
necessary, the cursor can be moved back to either the Airway or Exit waypoint fields to change the selected
airway segment. Otherwise, press the ENT Key with the cursor over the LOAD prompt to load the airway
into the flight plan.
Figure 5-77 Loading the Airway into the Flight Plan
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-83
GPS NAVIGATION
Airway optional waypoints are not loaded
Not all of the waypoints available in the database for an airway are actually needed to define the route. All
of the airway waypoints are made available to choose as an exit waypoint, but when the airway is actually
loaded into the flight plan, the “optional” waypoints are not included.
For the purpose of this discussion, “optional” waypoints on an airway are those waypoints that meet all of
the following criteria:
• The waypoint is not a navaid (VOR or NDB)
• The waypoint is not needed to define a course change
• The waypoint is not an ATC compulsory reporting point
In the example, airway V12 was loaded after entry waypoint ANX ending with exit waypoint TOY. There
are a total of 10 waypoints available in that segment: ANX, OCTAM, FRANC, HUCKS, COU, STITH, FTZ,
AUGST, SNYDR and TOY, however only 5 are actually needed to define the route: ANX, FRANC, COU, FTZ
and TOY.
It is possible that one of the “optional” waypoints (OCTAM, HUCKS, STITH, AUGST or SNYDR) could be
needed later - see the discussion of inserting airway optional waypoints below for more about that.
Load the selected airway segment into the flight plan
When the pilot presses the ENT Key with the cursor over the LOAD prompt on the Airway Loading Page,
the selected airway segment is loaded into the flight plan. The system returns to the Flight Plan Page with
the cursor position placed on the line just after the exit waypoint of the airway segment.
Figure 5-78 Returning to the Flight Plan Page
5-84
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
In the example, waypoints FRANC and COU were originally in the departure procedure. Because the
airway was loaded after ANX, those waypoints were removed from the departure, but were then added
back in because they were also on the selected airway (V12). Note that FRANC and COU would have been
removed from the departure regardless of which airway was selected at ANX.
The rules for removing bypassed waypoints in the original flight plan are as follows:
1. Waypoints within an arrival or approach procedure will never be removed during the load airway
operation. Note that the pilot can always remove individual waypoints if necessary.
2. If there is a sequence of waypoints in the original flight plan starting with the entry waypoint that lines
up with a sequence of waypoints in the new airway segment, that sequence is removed from the original flight
plan (so it doesn’t get duplicated). This rule applies only to the departure and enroute/airway parts of the
flight plan (not the arrival or the approach).
3. If the airway was inserted at a departure waypoint, all the waypoints in the departure procedure following
the insertion point will be removed (when the pilot joins an airway from a departure waypoint, he is not
intending to come back to the departure).
4. If the airway was inserted at an existing airway waypoint, the remaining waypoints in the airway will be
removed (the pilot is using the Airway Loading page to replace all or part of the previously selected airway
segment).
If there is not enough room in the flight plan to insert the airway segment, a pop-up message is displayed:
“Flight Plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” When this happens, the flight plan will not be changed.
Determination of “flight plan full” will account for the number of waypoints to be added with the new airway
segment as well as the number of bypassed waypoints that would be removed from the original flight plan.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-85
GPS NAVIGATION
DISPLAY OF AIRWAYS ON THE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE
AIRWAY HEADING
When an airway segment has been inserted into the flight plan a white heading is displayed after the entry
waypoint as shown in Figure 5-80.
Airway Identifier
Exit Waypoint
Identifier
Figure 5-79 Airway Header
Airway – aaaaa.wwwww, where aaaaa is the airway identifier and wwwww is the exit waypoint identifier
(Figure 5-79). Below the airway header, the waypoints of the airway are indented one space to create some
visual separation between the airway and any subsequent off-airway waypoints that could be used on the
flight plan. The PFD Flight Plan Window only displays the airway identifier and exit waypoint (Figure 580).
Airway Identifier
Exit Waypoint
Identifier
Figure 5-80 Airway Header on PFD
OPERATIONS USING THE CURSOR
1) On the MFD, bringing the cursor over the airway heading centers the map on the airway segment.
2) Pressing the CLR Key displays a prompt asking “Remove aaaaa.wwwww from Flight Plan OK or CANCEL”. If
OK is pressed, the airway segment is removed (but not the entry waypoint). If the exit waypoint is the entry
waypoint of a subsequent airway or if it overlaps an arrival or an approach, the exit waypoint is not removed.
3) ‘Load Airway’ can be selected with the cursor over the airway heading. That brings back the Airway Loading
Page which is initialized to the airway segment that is currently in the flight plan.
4) A new waypoint can be entered with the cursor over the airway header. The new waypoint is inserted ahead of
the airway header (after the airway entry waypoint).
5-86
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
COLLAPSE AIRWAYS FEATURE
‘Collapse Airways’ is selectable from the Flight Plan Menu if the flight plan contains at least one airway and
the current state is “expanded” (Figure 5-81). In similar fashion, “Expand Airways” will be selectable if the
flight plan contains airways and the current state is “collapsed”. When airways have been collapsed, it will
be indicated on the airway heading.
Figure 5-81 Collapse Airway Feature
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS ON THE PFD FLIGHT PLAN WINDOW
On the PFD Flight Plan Window when the airway display has been collapsed, only the Entry and Exit
waypoints of the airway will be shown. When collapsed format is active, leg-to-leg computed values such as
DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint reflects the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden
in the collapsed display. The DTK value is inhibited because its meaning is not clear in this context.
The “Expanded” format will automatically be selected after the “Load Airway” function is used (facilitates
review of the flight plan).
ACTIVE LEG DISPLAY WITH COLLAPSED AIRWAY ACTIVE
The Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible:
• From Waypoint
• To Waypoint
• Next Waypoint (shows the next course)
To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed airway segment, the airway
segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint will be automatically expanded.
INSERTING OPTIONAL AIRWAY WAYPOINTS
Occasionally, the pilot will need to be able to insert one of the “optional” airway waypoints into the flight
plan. To make this easy, they are provided on a list like FPL, NRST and RECENT. The list is called AIRWAY.
To add one of these to the flight plan, place the cursor over and left-click the FMS Knob, select the list which
will have the desired waypoint, select one and press the ENT Key to insert it into the flight plan.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-87
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-82 Inserting Optional Airspace Waypoints
INSERTING OR DELETING OFF-AIRWAY WAYPOINTS WITHIN AIRWAYS
The pilot is always allowed to insert or delete waypoints within an airway segment. Except for inserting or
deleting airway “optional” waypoints, it will usually have the effect of breaking one airway segment into two
pieces. For example, consider the original airway segment as follows:
ABI
Airway – V16.TXK
UKW
BYP
PRX
TXK
If “non-optional” waypoint BYP is deleted from the middle, the single airway sequence becomes two
sequences because the resultant sequence UKW-PRX is now off-airway. The results are the same if an offairway waypoint is inserted.
ABI
Airway – V16.UKW
UKW
PRX
Airway – V16.TXK
TXK
Deleting the entry waypoint (ABI), creates a new entry waypoint and the airway header moves down as
shown here:
UKW
Airway – V16.TXK
BYP
PRX
TXK
5-88
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Deleting the exit waypoint (TXK), causes the airway header to change:
ABI
Airway – V16.PRX
UKW
BYP
PRX
Since the exit waypoint of one airway is often the entry waypoint of the next airway, it is also possible that
two adjacent airway segments can be modified when a single waypoint is inserted or deleted.
At minimum, an airway segment consists of two waypoints. The airway header is removed for any
transaction that would create an airway segment that is not at least two waypoints long. For example,
deleting UKW from the previous example creates ABI-BYP as an off-airway sequence ahead of a single V16
airway segment:
ABI
BYP
Airway – V16.PRX
PRX
What happens if a waypoint is deleted from within an airway and subsequently re-inserted it into the
original spot? The system does not restore the original airway arrangement. Continuing the previous
example, re-inserting UKW restores the original airway waypoint sequence, but the Airway header does not
get restored (the system sees UKW as just another off-airway waypoint that is being inserted):
ABI
UKW
BYP
Airway – V16.PRX
PRX
Airway “optional” waypoints can be inserted or deleted in airway segments without breaking the airway
into pieces. In addition, inserting or deleting a VNV ATK Offset waypoint is always allowed on an airway
without affect on the airway.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-89
GPS NAVIGATION
DIRECTIONAL AIRWAYS/INVERTING FLIGHT PLANS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
The Airway Loading Page will be smart about these directional considerations so that only correct airway
sequences can be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts that flight plan the system inverts the airway
waypoint sequence but remove all of the airway headers.
NOTE: In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These
airways will always be bi-directional in the G1000 database – this is an ARINC 424 limitation.
AIRWAYS AND DATABASE UPDATES
The G1000 allows saving stored flight plans with airways on them. When the database is updated, the
airways will need to be reloaded in a fashion similar to what is done for departures, arrivals and approaches.
The basic process is that each airway segment is reloaded from the database given the entry waypoint, the
airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This re-loads the sequence of waypoints between the entry and exit
waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated).
If “optional” airway waypoints have been inserted within the airway sequence, those waypoints will be
included when the airway is updated whenever possible.
The update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway is removed from the flight
plan. The following things could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database
• Airway identifier not found in the new database
• Airway entry waypoint is not an acceptable entry waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer
on the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used as an entry waypoint.
• Airway exit waypoint is not an acceptable exit waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer
on the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used as an exit waypoint (given
the entry waypoint)
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan
5-90
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV)
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for VNV Flight Planning definitions, abbreviations, and acronyms.
The G1000 System can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, entered by the pilot or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database.
The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the
procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude will not be in the database. In this case the altitude may
be entered manually.
When activating or loading an arrival or approach procedure into an active flight plan, the VNV ‘ALT’ fields
will be populated with any altitudes that can be retrieved from the navigation database.
To help interpret the meanings of how the altitudes are presented, keep the following points in mind:
• When the altitude is displayed in light blue, the system is using that altitude to determine vertical speed
and deviation guidance.
• When the altitude is displayed in white, it is not being used by the system to determine the vertical speed
and deviation guidance.
•
An altitude displayed as small text is an altitude that is published in the navigation database.
• Altitudes displayed as a light blue halftone cannot be used in the current vertical navigation
calculations.
Refer to Figure 5-83 and Table 5-3 for more detail regarding the significance of text size and color.
Large
White Text
Large Light
Blue Text
Small Light
Blue Text
Small Light Blue
HalftoneText
Figure 5-83 VNV Altitudes
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Small White
Text with
Altitude
Restriction Bar
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-91
GPS NAVIGATION
Large Text
Small Text
White Text
Altitude calculated by the
system estimating the altitude of
the aircraft as it passes over the
navigation point. This altitude
is provided as a reference and
is not being used by the system
to determine vertical speed and
deviation guidance.
Altitude is not being used to
determine vertical speed and
deviation guidance. Altitude
has been retrieved from the
navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
Light Blue Text
Light Blue Halftone Text
Altitude has been entered by the
pilot. Altitude is being used by
the system for vertical speed and
deviation guidance. Altitude does
not match the published altitude
in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude is being used by the
system for vertical speed and
deviation guidance. Altitude
has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been
entered by the pilot and matches
a published altitude in the
navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance.
Table 5-3 VNV Altitude Text Size and Color
Some altitudes retrieved from the database have associated restrictions indicating to stay ‘At’, ‘At or
Above’, or ‘At or Below’ a specific altitude. These restrictions are indicated using a ‘bar’ above and/or below
the appropriate altitude as shown in Figure 5-85.
Stay AT or ABOVE 5,000 ft
Stay AT 2,300 ft
Stay AT or BELOW 3,000 ft
Figure 5-84 Altitude Restrictions
Note: Vertical constraints and along track offset waypoints are not retained in stored flight plans.
Enabling/Cancelling VNV guidance:
1)
Select the Active Flight Plan Page.
2)
Press the CNCL VNV Softkey. Canceling VNV results in VNV outputs V DEV (vertical deviation), VS REQ (vertical
speed required), and TIME TO TOD/BOD (time to top of descent/bottom of descent) going invalid. As a result the
non-numeric vertical deviation and VS REQ indicators on the PFD are removed. Additionally the V DEV, VS REQ,
and TIME TO TOD displayed in the Current VNV Profile box on the Active Flight Plan Page is dashed.
Once cancelled, VNV will remain disabled until manually enabled or a direct-to waypoint is entered
while in reversionary mode. When cancelled the CNCL VNV Softkey will change to ENBL VNV. VNV can
be enabled by pressing the ENBL VNV Softkey causing a VNV waypoint to be selected (if possible) and
vertical navigation to resume.
5-92
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
The G1000 provides a means to enter altitude constraints associated with waypoints in the active flight
plan so long as the waypoint is not the final approach fix, a waypoint after the FAF, or part of an unsupported
lateral leg type.
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundreth. An
altitude constraint in above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. To convert the value to AGL,
turn the FMS Knob when MSL is highlighted and press the ENT Key. When a database altitude restriction is
displayed, the G1000 allows user entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively overriding
the database restriction (only before the FAF). The G1000 allows activation of a displayed database altitude
restriction by highlighting the database constraint and selecting the ENT Key. When a database altitude
restriction of type “AT or ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the G1000 uses the “AT” portion of the
restriction to define the vertical profile.
The G1000 annunciates all constraints that cannot be used to calculate vertical guidance by displaying the
value in halftone, light blue text. The following conditions constitute an invalid altitude constraint:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle to be exceeded
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The pilot is attempting to add an altitude constraint to the FAF or a waypoint past the FAF of an approach
that provides vertical guidance (i.e. ILS or GPS WAAS approach)
• The pilot is attempting to add an altitude constraint to any waypoint past the FAF of an approach that does
not provide vertical guidance (i.e. not an ILS or GPS WAAS approach).
To enter altitudes as a flight level, enter an “F” in the most significant digit by rotating the inner FMS Knob
counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9, the system will automatically change to show units of Flight
Level.
NOTE: Vertical constraints and Along Track offset waypoints are not retained in stored flight plans.
NOTE: When an altitude constraint is subdued it means that the user has selected a vertical profile that
cannot be flown. The computed FPA for adjacent vertical constraints is too steep.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-93
GPS NAVIGATION
Entering an altitude constraint:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Highlight the desired waypoint altitude field (Figure 5-85).
3) Enter an alt constraint value using the FMS Knob or the Control Unit number keys.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the VNV altitude constraint.
VNV ALT Field
Figure 5-85 Entering an Altitude Constraint
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT MODIFICATION
The pilot can modify or delete any altitude constraint. An altitude constraint is deleted by highlighting
the altitude and pressing the CLR then ENT Key. In the event an altitude constraint is deleted and the
navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral waypoint, the G1000 displays the altitude
restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude can be provided.
Changing an altitude constraint:
1. Select the Active Flight Plan Page.
2. Highlight the desired altitude constraint.
3. Use the FMS Knob or control unit number keys to change the altitude constraint value.
4. Press the ENT Key to confirm the change.
Deleting an altitude constraint:
1. Select the Active Flight Plan Page.
2. Highlight the desired altitude constraint.
3. Press the CLR Key.
4. Press the ENT Key.
5-94
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
NOTE: An along track offset waypoint cannot be created if it is not adjacent to its parent waypoint
The pilot can enter a waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint. Offset
distances can be entered from 1 to 99 nautical miles in increments of 1 nautical mile before the offset waypoint
(shown as a negative value) or after the offset waypoint (shown as a positive value).
A waypoint is allowed as long as the along track offset places the waypoint adjacent to its parent waypoint
in the lateral flight plan.
An along track offset that places a waypoint after the final approach fix of an approach is not allowed. Along
track offset waypoints lie along the great circle path of the existing lateral flight plan. Assigning an along track
offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted.
Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track offset waypoint inserted before the selected
lateral waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an along track offset waypoint inserted
after the selected lateral waypoint. The creation of multiple along track offset waypoints is allowed.
NOTE: If the CLR Key is pressed prior to completing the definition of the along track offset waypoint, the
along track offset waypoint will be removed.
NOTE: An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance
must be changed, the pilot must delete the existing along track offset waypoint and create a new one with
the corrected offset distance.
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Select the desired lateral waypoint.
3) Press the OFST Softkey.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 99 nautical miles (Figure 5-86). NOTE: The
offset also cannot exceed the distance to the next or previous lateral non-ATK offset waypoint.
Along Track Offset
Distance
Figure 5-86 Along Track Offset Distance
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-95
GPS NAVIGATION
Active VNV Waypoint
Altitude
Target Vertical
Speed
Required Vertical Speed
Flight Path Angle
Time To Bottom of
Descent
Vertical Deviation
Figure 5-87 VNV Profile
VNV PROFILE
The VNV profile can be changed by one of the following means:
• Changing the Flight Path Angle (FPA) for the descent segment
• Changing the target vertical speed for the descent segment
Changes to the VNV profile apply to the current active waypoint only. The VNV profile is not modifiable
if there is no active waypoint. An invalid entry results in the previous value being restored. The VNV
profile modification is invalid if it results in any of the following conditions:
• The maximum allowed FPA is exceeded
• The calculated target vertical speed exceeds the maximum allowed
• The TOD point is now located behind the aircraft’s present position or an s-turn would be required to
capture the modified vertical profile
• Modifying the vertical speed target for the current waypoint
The VS TGT will be computed using the FPA and current ground speed and updated on the display
periodically. If there is an active waypoint with a vertical component, a valid ground speed, and the
system determines the aircraft is airborne, the pilot can select and modify the VS TGT. Updates to the
field will cease when the field is selected for modification.
The VS TGT may be changed using the following sequence of actions:
Modifying the VS TGT:
1) Press the VNV PROF Softkey.
2) Use the small FMS Knob, or enter the desired value or to modify the value.
3) Press the VNV PROF Softkey again when finished or press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor from the VNV
Profile (NOTE: VS TGT must be negative and cannot be less than the configured minimum value).
5-96
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Upon completion of entering a new VS TGT the G1000:
• Periodically computes a new FPA using the selected VS TGT and current ground speed until the TOD
is reached
• Uses the newly computed FPA for the active waypoint with a vertical component
• Resumes periodic updates of the VS TGT using the new FPA and current ground speed. VNV profile
changes apply to the active waypoint only.
The active waypoint with a vertical component and its FPA is shown in the current VNV profile
information box. The pilot can change the FPA.
Modifying the flight path angle:
1) Select the FPA by pressing the VNV PROF Softkey followed by a clockwise turn of the large FMS Knob. It can
also be selected by scrolling past the end of the active flight plan waypoint list.
2) Modify the value using the small FMS Knob. The FPA must be negative and cannot be less than the configured
minimum value.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-97
GPS NAVIGATION
NAVIGATING AN EXAMPLE FLIGHT PLAN
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the WAAS capable GPS system while
the G1000 provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in
much the same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. Enroute altitude will be 12,000 feet. An LPV (WAAS)
approach will be selected for runway 35R. A missed approach will be executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has published altitudes contained in the navigation database, these are for
turbojet aircraft only. Accept or change these values as desired to meet the requirements of the clearance.
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-88 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
2) Figure 5-88 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
Figure 5-88 Assigned Heading of 240º
5-98
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-89. Note the current CDI flight phase is now ENR (Enroute). When the aircraft reached
30 nautical miles from the departure point, the flight phase changed from TERM to ENR on the HSI and CDI
scaling changed to 2.0 nm.
Figure 5-89 Assigned Heading of 290º
4) V4 will now be entered into the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the point that proceeds V4 will be entered as shown in Figure 5-90.
Figure 5-90 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4, in
this case Topeka VOR (TOP) will be used as shown in Figure 5-91.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-99
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-91 Entering V4 Entry Point
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is now inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-92.
Figure 5-92 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-92, turn the small FMS Knob to the right. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
f) Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-93.
5-100
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-93 List of Available Airways for TOP
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-93.
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits is now displayed as in Figure 5-94.
Figure 5-94 List of Available Exits for V4
i)
If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as seen
in Figure 5-94.
j)
Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in Figure
5-95.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-101
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-95 Ready to Load V4
k) Press the ENT Key.
l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-96.
Figure 5-96 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) V4 will now be made the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SLN. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg.
c) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-97. Note the TOP to SLN
leg is actually part of V4.
5-102
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-97 Comfirm Active Leg
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-98, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note also,
the crosstrack (XTK) distance on the HSI indicating 16.9 nm to the intercept point.
Figure 5-98 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When 2.0 nm from the intercept, the XTK will disappear from the
HSI and the CDI will be positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-99.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-103
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5- Turn on to Active Leg
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) will be intercepted. Turn prompts will be displayed in the PFD Navigation
Status Box as seen in Figure 5-100
Figure 5-100 Turn to Intercept V244
9) As seen in Figure 5-101, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
Figure 5-101 V244 Now Active Leg
5-104
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 will be intercepted. See Figure 5-102.
Figure 5-102 HYS to LAA Leg Active
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises to
expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
c) Press the Direct-to (
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-103.
Figure 5-103 Direct To OPSHN
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-104.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-105
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-104 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-105.
Figure 5-105 Enter VNV Offset Distance
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which the selected altitude will be reached. In this case, three
miles prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the G1000 will give vertical guidance so the aircraft will arrive
at an altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-106, the magenta arrow indicating the directto OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset distance
and altitude that was previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure have no
database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a track along
the magenta line to OPSHN.
5-106
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database that
will be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude, then
pressing the ENT Key. The altitude will now be displayed as light blue meaning it will now be used by the system
to determine vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Figure 5-106 Direct-to Active
12) While proceeding to OPSHN, the LPV approach to runway 35R is preferred and will be used.
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-107.
Figure 5-107 Proceudures Window
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport will be displayed as in
Figure 5-108.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-107
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-108 List of Available Approaches
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-108.
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as shown on Figure 5109.
Figure 5-109 List of Available Transitions
e) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK will
be used.
f) Press the ENT Key.
g) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-110.
5-108
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-110 Loaded Approach
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-110. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are initially displayed as white text, indicating these values will not
be used in computing vertical deviation guidance. The altitude values must be designated for use by the pilot if
they are to be used in computing vertical guidance.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the altitude field associated with the IAF at HABUK as in Figure
5-111.
Figure 5-111 Designate HABUK Altitude Constraint
c) Press the ENT Key. Note the altitude is now displayed as light blue text (Figure 5-35), indicating that the value
will now be used in computing vertical guidance. The G1000 will be using baro corrected altitude when giving
vertical guidance to these waypoints.
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the altitude constraint associated with FALUR as seen in Figure 5-112.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-109
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-112 Designate FALUR Altitude Constraint
e) Press the ENT Key to designate this altitude constraint value for use in computing vertical guidance. This
altitude value will now be displayed as light blue text. Note that altitude values are now filled in for waypoints
back to where the previous altitude value was entered for OPSHN.
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values will always be displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-36.
Vertical guidance to the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS altitude
source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
Figure 5-113 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust how fast, or steep, the upcoming descent
will be. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed will be computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
a) Press the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-114.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to entered the desired value.
5-110
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint and
gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this example,
vertical guidance will be provided at the TOD that will result in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
Figure 5-114 Adjusting the Descent
c) Press the ENT Key.
15) As seen in Figure 5-115, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reached the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are now
displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-116.
Figure 5-115 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-111
GPS NAVIGATION
Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
(RVSI)
Figure 5-116 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established which places the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-117.
Keep Vertical Deviation
Pointer Centered
Align Actual
Vertical Speed
with Required
Vertical Speed
Figure 5-117 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) this will be annunciated as shown in Figure
5-118. Upon reaching OPSHN, the aircraft will be at 10,000 feet.
5-112
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-118 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading will be annunciated at the top left of
the PFD as seen in Figure 5-119. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius
to intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
Figure 5-119 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-113
GPS NAVIGATION
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival will turn magenta as shown in Figure 5-120. The magenta
arrow in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
Figure 5-120 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-121). At a point 31 nautical
miles from the destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI will change to Terminal Mode and is
annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
There will be a descent to HABUK in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the
upcoming turn and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
5-114
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-121 Approaching PYNON
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-115
GPS NAVIGATION
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure will automatically become active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-122).
Figure 5-122 Approach Leg is Now Active
To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-123.
Figure 5-123 Activate Missed Approach
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude will be 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
5-116
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-124 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-125) when the final approach course becomes active.
Figure 5-125 Descending to the FAF
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under
(‘At’) the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-125.
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-126.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-117
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-126 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
In this missed approach procedure, the fix immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368FT’) is not part of the
published procedure. It is simply a fix that defines a leg which guides the aircraft along the runway centerline
until the required altitude to make the first turn on the missed approach is exceeded. In this case, if the aircraft
altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to will be established to
this fix until an altitude of 6,368 feet reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to will be established to the
published fix (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the
MAP, a direct-to will be established to the published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure. The
altitude constraint value defaults to 400 feet AGL when the fix is not part of the published procedure.
In some missed approach procedures this altitude fix may be part of the published procedure. For example, the
procedure dictates a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP).
In this case, the altitude fix would be labeled ‘5500FT’. Again, if the aircraft altitude is lower than this prescribed
altitude, a direct-to will be established to this fix when the missed approach procedure is activated.
5-118
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-127.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the
HSI.
Figure 5-127 Missed Approach Active
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern will be established
at the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-128.
Figure 5-128 Establishing the Holding Pattern
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-129.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-119
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-129 Hold Established
5-120
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
PARALLEL TRACK (PTK)
NOTE: Enroute/Terminal VNV (baro-VNV) is disabled when parallel track is active. This will cause vertical
deviation to flag and the autopilot to uncouple from VNV. Parallel track disregards all vertical aspects of the
flight plan; that is, parallel track ignores baro-VNV.
Parallel Track
Course Line
Figure 5-130 Parallel Tracking
The Parallel Track (PTK) menu option (Figure 5-131) allows the pilot to create a parallel course offset of 1
to 99 nm to the left or right of the current flight plan (Figure 5-130). Parallel Track cannot be activated if a
course is set using Direct-to or if the active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure, or the Initial Approach
Fix (IAF) has been passed. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions results in the message
‘PARALLEL TRACK UNAVAILABLE INVALID ROUTE GEOMETRY’.
Figure 5-131 Parallel Track Menu Option
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-121
GPS NAVIGATION
When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel course (Figure
5-132), and waypoint names will have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier (Figure 5-133).
North
TO
WPT
Course
BRG
TRK
DTK
Parallel Track Distance
FROM
WPT
Figure 5-132 Parallel Track
Figure 5-133 Parallel Track “p” Designation
Using Direct-to, loading an approach, holding pattern, or editing and executing the flight plan will automatically
cancel Parallel Track. Parallel track is cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel tracks
overlap as a result of the course change.
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the MENU Key from the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Select ‘Parallel Track’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The direction field is highlighted.
4) Select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’.
5) Press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
6) Enter a distance from 1-99 nm.
7) Press the ENT Key.
5-122
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
8) With ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL TRACK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 5-134).
9) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the Parallel Track Window.
Figure 5-134 Activate PT Option
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-123
GPS NAVIGATION
5.19 FLIGHT PLANNING (PFD)
Flight planning on the PFD centers around the Flight Plan Window (Figure 5-135) where flight plans can be
created, edited, and activated. The Flight Plan Window is enabled and disabled by pressing the FPL Key.
Flight Plan Title
Desired Track
Leg Distance
Active Leg
Next Available
Memory Position
Figure 5-135 Flight Plan Window
OPERATIONS
The following operations can be performed using the Flight Plan Window Menu (Figure 5-136).
• Activate leg
• Store, invert, or delete flight plan
• Load or remove departure, arrival, or approach
• Closest Point of FPL
• Restore defaults
• Parallel track
Figure 5-136 Flight Plan Page Menu
CREATE NEW FLIGHT PLAN
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints in each flight plan can be created and stored in memory.
5-124
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Creating a new flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor. The waypoint field is highlighted.
3) Enter the identifier, city/state, or facility name of the airport/waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the next empty waypoint field.
5) Enter the identifier for each additional waypoint.
6) Press the FPL Key to remove the window.
ACTIVATE LEG
‘Activate Leg’ selects the highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently used for
navigation guidance).
Activating a flight plan along a specific leg:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired destination waypoint.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Highlight ‘Activate Leg’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-125
GPS NAVIGATION
STORE FLIGHT PLAN
The active flight plan is erased when the G1000 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated.
When storing flight plans with an approach, departure or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information
from the current database to define the waypoints in the flight plan. If the navigation database is changed
or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been modified. If an
approach, departure or arrival procedure is no longer available, the flight plan becomes “locked” until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan or until the correct navigation database is installed.
Storing a flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Window (once all of the waypoints have been entered), press the MENU Key to display the
page menu.
2) Select ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Store Flight Plan Window is displayed with ‘OK’ highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan in the next available memory slot.
5) Press the ENT Key.
INVERT FLIGHT PLAN
‘Invert Flight Plan’ reverses the active flight plan. After traveling along a flight plan, the pilot may wish to
reverse the route for navigation back to the original departure point.
Activating an existing flight plan in reverse:
1) From the Flight Plan window, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’.
5) Press the ENT Key. The flight plan is now reversed and activated.
5-126
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
DELETE FLIGHT PLAN
The entire flight plan or selected waypoints within the flight plan may be deleted.
Deleting the entire flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to delete all waypoints in the flight plan.
Deleting selected waypoints in the flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove Waypoint Name?’ Window is displayed with ‘OK’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint. It may also be used to create a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a
chosen reference waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Closest Point of FPL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A window appears with the reference waypoint field highlighted.
4) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight
plan from the selected reference waypoint.
6) To create a user waypoint at this location and add it to the flight plan, press the ENT Key. The name for the new
user waypoint is derived from the identifier or the reference waypoint.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-127
GPS NAVIGATION
PARALLEL TRACK (PFD)
The Parallel Track (PTK) function allows the pilot to create a parallel course offset of 1 to 99 nm to the
left or right of the current flight plan. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using Direct-To
or if the active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure, or the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) has been
passed. Attempting to activate Parallel Track with these conditions results in the message ‘PARALLEL TRACK
UNAVAILABLE INVALID ROUTE GEOMETRY’. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on
the map pages shows the parallel course, and waypoint names will have a lower case “p” located after the
identifier (Figure 5-137).
‘p’ Designation
Figure 5-137 Parallel Track ‘p’ Designation
Using Direct-To, loading an approach, holding pattern, or editing and executing the flight plan will
automatically cancel Parallel Track. Parallel track is cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or
the parallel tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the MENU Key from the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Select ‘Parallel Track’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Direction field is highlighted.
4) Select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’.
5) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Distance’ field is highlighted.
6) Enter a distance from 1-99 nm.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL TRACK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5-128
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Enter Distance
Figure 5-138 Parallel Track Distance Field
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the MENU Key from the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Select ‘Parallel Track’.
2) Select ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK’ (Figure 5-139).
3) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 5-139 Cancelling Parallel Track
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-129
GPS NAVIGATION
5.20 PROCEDURES (MFD)
LEG TYPES SUPPORTED BY THE G1000
There are currently 23 different database leg types. All 23 published procedures and leg types are supported
by the G1000 and available to the pilot for flight planning.
• AF - DME arc to a fix
• RF – Constant radius turn to fix
• CF – Course to a fix
• TF – Track between two fixes
• DF – Direct to a fix
• CA – Course to an altitude
• FA – Course from fix to an altitude
• CD – Course to a DME distance
• FC – Course from fix to distance
• CI – Course to an intercept
• FD – Course from fix to DME distance
• CR – Course to a radial
• FM – Course from fix to manual termination
• VA – Heading vector to an altitude
• HA – Hold terminating at altitude
• VD – Heading vector to DME distance
• HF – Hold terminating at a fix
• VI – Heading vector to an intercept
• HM – Hold with manual termination
• VM – Heading vector to manual termination
• IF – Initial fix
• VR – Heading vector to a radial
• PI – Procedure turn to course intercept
NOTE: The G1000 supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,
VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM.
5-130
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
DEPARTURES, ARRIVALS, AND APPROACHES
Options
Arrival Loaded in Active
Flight Plan
Approach Procedure
Loaded in Active Flight Plan
Departure Procedure
Loaded in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-140 Procedures Window
DEPARTURE OPERATIONS
Loading and activating a departure procedure:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed (Figure 5-140).
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The DEPARTURE window is displayed on the ‘PROC – DEPARTURE LOADING Page.
4) Select a departure.
5) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed.
6) Select a runway.
7) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window may be displayed.
8) Select a transition.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The departure procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight
plan and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
OR:
1) With the Departure Information Page displayed (Figure 5-141), press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter an identifier, facility name or city location field.
3) Press the ENT Key until the DEPARTURE window is displayed.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-131
GPS NAVIGATION
4) Select a departure.
5) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed.
6) Select a runway.
7) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window may be displayed.
8) Select a transition.
9) Press the ENT Key. The departure is now ready to load.
10) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Airport Information
Available Departures
Available Runways
Map Showing
Selected
Departure
Available Transitions
List of Legs
in Departure
Sequence
Figure 5-141 Departure Information Page
Activating a departure leg:
1) Press the FPL key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint within the departure.
4) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. A confirmation window showing the selected leg will be displayed.
5) With ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
Figure 5-142 Activate Leg Option
5-132
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Viewing a Departure Airport:
1) Select the Departure Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Departure Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Airport Page is displayed.
OR:
1) Select the Approach Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Departure Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Information Page is displayed.
OR:
1) Select the Arrival Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Departure Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Information Page is displayed.
5) Enter an identifier, facility, or city name for the departure airport.
Removing a departure:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Select the ‘Remove Departure’ option.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-133
GPS NAVIGATION
ARRIVAL OPERATIONS
Loading an arrival procedure:
1) Select the ‘WPT’ page group.
2) Select the first rectangular page icon.
3) Press the STAR Softkey.
Arrival Airport Information
Available Departures
Available Transitions
Available Runways
List of Legs
in Departure
Sequence
Map Showing
Selected Arrival
Figure 5-143 Arrival Loading Page
4) Select an arrival.
5) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
6) Select a transition.
7) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed. If so, select a runway.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The arrival procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight plan
and is placed at the end of the enroute flight plan.
OR:
1) Press the PROC Softkey.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ARRIVAL window is displayed on the ‘PROC – ARRIVAL LOADING’ Page.
4) Select an arrival.
5) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
6) Select a transition.
5-134
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
7) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed. If so, select a runway.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The arrival procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight plan
and is placed at the end of the enroute flight plan.
OR:
1) Select the Arrival Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Active Flight Plan Page is displayed. The arrival procedure is displayed as part of the
overall flight plan and is placed at the end of the enroute flight plan.
Removing an arrival:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Select the ‘Remove Approach’, ‘Remove Arrival’ or ‘Remove Departure’ option.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-135
GPS NAVIGATION
APPROACH OPERATIONS
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (WAAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures for
the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
The G1000 provides guidance for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published
instrument approach procedures. The Procedures Page is displayed by pressing the PROC Key. The Procedures
Page provides direct access to approaches — based upon the active flight plan or direct-to destination.
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
the pilot to continue navigating via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the
procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint
in the approach.
Not all approaches in the database are approved for GPS use. When selecting an approach, a “GPS”
designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver.
Some procedures will not have this designation, meaning the GPS receiver can be used for supplemental
navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for primary guidance, the appropriate
navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or ILS). The final course segment of
ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to the proper frequency and selecting
that Nav receiver on the CDI.
The G1000 WAAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, and LPV approaches according to the published
chart. LNAV+V is a standard LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance provided to assist the pilot in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance will be
displayed on the G1000 PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases
where LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima shall be used. The active
approach type will be annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
HSI
ANNUNCIATION
LNAV
LNAV+V
L/VNAV
LPV
5-136
DESCRIPTION
GPS approach using published
LNAV minima.
GPS approach using published
LNAV minima. Advisory vertical
guidance is provided.
GPS approach using published
LNAV/VNAV minima.
GPS approach using published
LPV minima.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
WAAS Approach
Channels
Map Showing
Selected
Approach
Available Approaches
List of Legs
in Departure
Sequence
Figure 5-144 Approach Loading Page
Load and/or activate an approach procedure:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach. The WAAS channel and ID for the selected approach
procedure are displayed in the ‘APPROACH CHANNEL’ field (Figure 5-145).
5) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach procedure is now displayed.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to selected the desired transition. The “Vectors” option assumes vectors will be received
to the final course segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach
course.
7) Press the ENT Key. ACTIVATE?’ is now displayed. Selecting ‘LOAD?’ will enter the selected approach procedure
into the active flight plan, but will not be currently active. Selecting ‘ACTIVATE?’ will enter the selected approach
procedure into the active flight plan and make it immediately active.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either ‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’.
9) Press the ENT Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-137
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-145 Not Approved for GPS Message
OR:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Select the desired nearest airport.
3) Press the APR Softkey located at the bottom of the display. The LD APR (load approach) Softkey becomes
available.
4) Select the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey. The Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Select the desired transition.
7) Press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the approach. If navigating a flight plan previous to loading this approach, the G1000
will continue navigating the flight plan until the approach is activated.
9) Highlight the ‘ACTIVATE’ field.
10) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach and begin navigating to the IAP.
11) If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ message is displayed with ‘YES’ highlighted.
Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message (or select ‘NO’).
12) Press the ENT Key to return to the Approach Loading Page.
OR:
1) From any page, press the PROC Key. The Procedures Options Menu is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The APPROACH window is displayed on the ‘PROC – APPROACH LOADING’ Page.
4) Select an approach.
5) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
6) Select a transition (the ‘VECTORS’ option assumes vectors will be received to the final course segment of the
approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach course.)
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Highlight ‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’. ‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the
approach for navigation guidance. This allows for the original flight plan to continue navigating until cleared
5-138
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
for the approach, but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed. ‘ACTIVATE’ adds the
approach to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.
9) If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ message is displayed with ‘YES’ highlighted.
Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message. To cancel the approach, select ‘NO’ and press the ENT Key.
OR:
1) From the Approach Loading Page Window, highlight the ‘CHANNEL’ field (Figure 5-146).
WAAS Channel Field
Figure 5-146 WAAS Channel Selection
2) Enter the desired channel number.
3) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
4) Select a transition (the ‘VECTORS’ option assumes vectors will be received to the final course segment of the
approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach course).
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Highlight ‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’. ‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the
approach for navigation guidance. This allows for the original flight plan to continue navigating until cleared for
the approach, but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed. ‘Activate’ adds the approach
to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.
Removing an approach from a direct-to or active flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Remove Departure’, ‘Remove Arrival’, or ‘Remove Approach’
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window appears listing the procedure that is about to be removed with ‘OK’
highlighted.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-139
GPS NAVIGATION
4) Press the ENT Key.
Another Procedures Window option allows the pilot to select vectors to the final approach course.
Activating a (previously loaded) approach, with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
In many cases, it may be easiest to “Load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to
the destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’
— which makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active. Otherwise, activate the full approach using
the ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ option.
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window will be displayed.
4) With ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5-140
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
COURSE TO FIX
In certain missed approach procedures, a fix will appear immediately following the MAP (Figure 5-108,
‘990 ft’). This is not necessarily part of the published procedure, it simply represents a course to an altitude
fix.
In certain cases, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (990 feet) after crossing the MAP, a
direct-to will be established to this fix until an altitude of 990 feet reached. After reaching 990 feet, a directto will be established to the published fix (in this case POLKE).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to will be established
to the published fix (POLKE) to begin the missed approach procedure. The altitude constraint defaults to
400 feet AGL when the fix is not part of the published procedure.
In some missed approach procedures this altitude fix may be part of the published procedure. For
example, the procedure dictates a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude fix would be labeled ‘5500 ft’. Again, if the aircraft altitude
is lower than this prescribed altitude, a direct-to will be established to this fix when the missed approach
procedure is activated.
Missed Approach Point
Course to
Altitude Fix
Figure 5-147 Course to Altitude Fix Special Condition
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-141
GPS NAVIGATION
5.21 PROCEDURES (PFD)
The Procedures Window (Figure 5-109) provides direct access to departures, arrivals and approaches — based
upon the active flight plan or direct-to destination. In either case, the departure and destination airports must
have published procedures associated with them. The Procedures Window is displayed and removed by pressing
the PROC Key .
OPERATIONS
Figure 5-148 Procedures Window
The following operations can be performed from the Procedures Window:
• Activate Vector-To-Final or approach
• Select approach, arrival, or departure
• Select missed approach
SELECT DEPARTURE
‘Select Departure’ selects a published standard instrument departure (SID) for the departure airport or
replaces the current departure with a new selection. When using a direct-to, the G1000 uses the nearest
airport as a reference when displaying available departures.
Available
Runways
Available
Departures
Available
Transitions
Figure 5-149 Selecting a Departure
5-142
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting a departure for the departure airport:
1) Display the Procedures Window by pressing the PROC Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Enter an identifier, city, or facility name.
5) Press the ENT Key until the departure field is highlighted.
6) Select the desired departure.
7) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available transitions for the departure.
8) Select the desired transition or vectors.
9) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available runways for the departure.
10) Select the desired runway.
11) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to load the departure.
SELECT ARRIVAL
‘SELECT ARRIVAL’ selects a published standard terminal arrival route (STAR) for the destination airport or
replaces a current arrival with a new selection.
Available
Transitions
Available
Arrivals
Figure 5-150 Selecting an Arrival
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-143
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting an arrival for a direct-to or flight plan destination airport:
1) Display the Procedures Window by pressing the PROC Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Select the ENT Key.
4) Enter an identifier, city, or facility name.
5) Press the ENT Key until the arrival field is highlighted.
6) Select the desired arrival.
7) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available transitions for the arrival.
8) Select the desired transition or vectors.
9) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available runways for the arrival.
10) Select the desired runway.
11) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to load the arrival.
SELECT APPROACH
‘SELECT APPROACH’ selects a published instrument approach for the destination airport or replaces the
current approach with a new selection.
Available
Transitions
Available
Approaches
Figure 5-151 Selecting an Approach
Selecting an approach for a direct-to or flight plan destination airport:
1) Display the Procedures Window by pressing the PROC Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Enter an identifier, city, or facility name.
5) Press the ENT Key until the approach field is highlighted.
6) Select the desired approach.
7) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available transitions for the approach.
8) Select the desired transition or vectors.
9) Press the ENT Key.
5-144
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
GPS NAVIGATION
10) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to load the approach OR: to activate the approach, highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’.
NOTE: If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ message is displayed with ‘YES’
highlighted. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message. To cancel the approach, select ‘NO’ and press the
ENT Key.
ACTIVATE APPROACH
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ activates the approach.
Figure 5-152 Activate Approach Selection
Activating the approach for a direct-to or flight plan destination airport:
1) From the active flight plan window, press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
5-145
GPS NAVIGATION
ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL
‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ allows the pilot to select vectors to the final approach course.
.
Figure 5-153 Activate Vector-To-Final Selection
Activating the approach with vectors to final:
1) From an active flight plan, press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Options Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH
‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’ allows the pilot to select vectors to the final approach course.
Figure 5-154 Activate Missed Approach Selection
Activating a missed approach:
1) From an active flight plan, press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Options Window.
2) Highlight ‘MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
5-146
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The hazard avoidance features available for the G1000 system are designed to aid situational awareness and
provide advisory information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain,
and air traffic.
Hazard avoidance in the G1000 is divided into the following categories:
Weather
• GDL 69/69A XM® Satellite Weather
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Weather Mapping Sensor
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Proximity (non-TSO-C151b-certified)
• TAWS (Terrain Awareness and Warning System)
Traffic
• TIS (Traffic Information Service)
• L-3 SKYWATCH® Traffic Advisory System
6.1 XM SATELLITE WEATHER
NOTE: XM Satellite Weather data provides information for avoiding hazardous weather. Never use it to
penetrate hazardous weather.
The GDL 69/69A is a remote-mounted data-link satellite receiver that is capable of receiving XM Satellite
Weather data and displaying received graphical weather information and associated text on the G1000 Multi
Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map. The GDL 69A can receive XM Satellite
Radio® entertainment services. Both weather data and entertainment programming operate in the S-band
frequency range to provide continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
XM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.xmradio.com.
ACTIVATING SERVICES
Before XM Satellite Weather can be used, the service must be activated. The service is activated by providing
XM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on the equipment.
For the GDL 69, the Data Radio ID must be provided to XM Satellite Radio services to activate the weather
service subscription. For the GDL 69A, either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID - or both - must be
provided to XM Satellite Radio to activate the weather service and/or entertainment subscriptions.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. XM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-1
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69/69A, allows it to display weather data and/or entertainment
programming.
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
Activating the XM Satellite Weather and XM Satellite Radio Services:
1) Contact XM Satellite Weather Radio through the email address listed on their website (www.xmradio.com) or
by the customer service phone number listed on the website. Follow the instructions provided by XM Satellite
Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the fifth rectangular page icon.
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
XM Satellite Radio activation instructions are also available at www.garmin.com (P/N 190-00355-04).
Data Radio ID
Audio Radio ID
Weather
Products
(Available
Products for
Service Class
Indicated in
Green)
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
6-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
USING XM SATELLITE WEATHER PRODUCTS
The Weather Data Link Page is in the Map group of pages. It is the primary starting point for viewing weather
data because it can display all available XM weather products. No other G1000 page can display all XM weather
products.
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the Navigation Map Page, the age of the
data displays on the screen. This represents the age of the product, based on the difference between when the
data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time (Figure 6-2).
Weather products are refreshed at specific intervals as defined in the Refresh Rate column in Table 6-1.
The refresh rate represents the interval at which XM Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not
contain new weather data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is
received by the Data Link Receiver. Weather data and new content are updated at intervals that are defined and
controlled by XM Satellite Radio and its data vendors.
If, for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within 30-, 60-, or 90-minute intervals as defined in
the Expiration Time column in Table 6-1, the data is considered expired and is removed from the display.
This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by XM Satellite Radio
services. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color and time displayed in the upper right
corner of the page changes from light blue to yellow.
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link Page
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-3
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration time and the refresh rate
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
5
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
60
15
Echo Top
30
7.5
XM Lightning (LTNG)
30
5
Cell Movement (SCIT)
30
12
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
60
12
METARs
90
12
City Forecast (CITY)
60
12
Surface Analysis (SFC)
60
12
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
60
12
Winds Aloft (WIND)
60
12
County Warnings (COUNTY)
60
5
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
60
12
30
60
60
5
12
12
Weather Product
Symbol
NEXRAD
Radar Coverage
TFRs
TAFs
no product image
no product image
no product image
Table 6-1 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
NOTE: The refresh rate represents the interval at which XM Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may
or may not contain new weather data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or
new content is received by the Data Link Receiver. Weather data is updated at intervals that are defined
and controlled by XM Satellite Radio and its data vendors.
6-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Table 6-2 shows which XM Satellite Weather products display on specific pages of the MFD and the PFD Inset
Map. The positive symbols represent the presence of this data on the page.
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
+
Echo Top
+
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
Weather Data Link
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Navigation Map Page
NEXRAD
PFD Inset Map
Weather Product
+
+
+
XM Lightning (LTNG)
+
+
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (SCIT)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
METARs
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Radar Coverage
TFRs
TAFs
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table 6-2 Weather Product Display Maps
WEATHER SOFTKEYS
Weather softkeys (Figure 6-3) display at the bottom of the Weather Data Link Page. Softkeys control the
display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map.
When a weather product is selected for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray. This
indicates that the product is enabled. Unavailable weather products have dimmed (disabled) softkey labels.
Figure 6-3 Weather Softkeys (Two Tiers)
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-5
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
LEGEND
Each active weather product has its own legend which displays only on the Weather Data Link Page. Note
that weather product legends are not interchangeable.
Viewing a weather legend:
1) Select the Map Page Group.
2) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
OR:
On the Weather Data Link Page, press the MENU Key, which displays the Page Menu Options. Turn the FMS
Knob to select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
5) To return to the previous page and remove the legend window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR
Key, or the FMS Knob.
NEXRAD
NOTE: The TOPO and/or TERRAIN display and NEXRAD are mutually exclusive for all applicable maps.
NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar) is a network of 158 high-resolution Doppler radar systems that are
operated by the National Weather Service (NWS). Its technical name is WSR-88D.
NEXRAD data provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and
selected overseas locations. The maximum range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 nautical miles. In
addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD network provides important information about severe
weather and air traffic safety.
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing, and dissemination of
NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent
delays and the relative age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use
NEXRAD data or any radar data to penetrate hazardous weather. Rather, use it in an early-warning capacity
of pre-departure and enroute evaluation.
6-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-4 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link Page
Press the NEXRAD Softkey to show NEXRAD weather and radar coverage information (Figure 6-4).
NEXRAD data displays on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Weather Data Link Page
• Navigation Map
• Nearest Pages
• Airport Information Page
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Flight Plan Page
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey. For the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey. This is not necessary on the Weather
Data Link Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of
the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to
indicate the weather severity level.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-7
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link Page. For the NEXRAD legend
(Figure 6-5), press the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for display.
Figure 6-5 NEXRAD Data with Legend
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. The
display indicates the currently available NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops areas in a grayish-purple
color where information is unavailable or is not being collected. This means that the radar capability exists
in the grayish-purple areas, but that it is not active or is off-line.
REFLECTIVITY
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
6-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD LIMITATIONS
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-6).
Block has an Area
of 4 sq. km
Figure 6-6 NEXRAD Data - Zoomed
NEXRAD radar images may display abnormalities:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-9
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ECHO TOPS
NOTE: Echo Tops is mutually exclusive with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD.
Echo Tops data (Figure 6-7) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. The information is derived from NEXRAD data.
Figure 6-7 Echo Tops Data
Press the ECHO TOP Softkey to show data about the highest radar echo. Note that Cloud Tops and Echo
Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude. Cloud Tops and Echo Tops are mutually exclusive.
When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops are removed.
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the ECHO TOPS Softkey.
Echo Tops data displays only on the Weather Data Link Page.
6-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-8), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display.
Radar Coverage
Figure 6-8 ECHO TOPS Legend
The display of radar coverage is always active when NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. The display
indicates the currently available NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops areas in a grayish-purple color where
information is unavailable or is not being collected. This means that the radar capability exists in the grayishpurple areas, but that it is not active or is off-line.
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be turned on at the same time.
Cloud Tops data (Figure 6-9) shows the altitude at the top of the clouds. This is determined from satellite
imagery.
Figure 6-9 Cloud Tops Data
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-11
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the CLOUD TOPS Softkey.
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-10), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected
for display.
Figure 6-10 Cloud Tops Legend
XM LIGHTNING
Lightning data (Figure 6-11) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. Strike
location is shown within a two kilometer region. The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
Lightning
Strikes
Figure 6-11 Lightning Data
6-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Press the LTNG or XM LTNG Softkey to show the location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. Lightning
data displays on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Weather Data Link Page
• Navigation Map
• Nearest Pages
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Flight Plan Page
Displaying XM Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey. For the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey. This is not necessary for the Weather
Data Link Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey or the LTNG Softkey for the Weather Data Link Page.
To display the XM Lightning legend (Figure 6-12), press the LEGEND Softkey when XM Lightning is
selected for display.
Figure 6-12 Lightning Legend
CELL MOVEMENT
Cell Movement data (Figure 6-13) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. The cells are represented by yellow squares, while the movement is represented by
arrows.
Cell Movement data is shown with NEXRAD data on most maps. On the Weather Data Link Page, Cell
Movement data is shown only when selected.
Storm Cells
Figure 6-13 Cell Movement Data
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-13
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Press the CELL MOV Softkey to show the storm cells on the Weather Data Link Page. Using the Navigation
Map Setup Window, Cell Movement data displays on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Weather Data Link Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages
Displaying Cell Movement information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey. For the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey. This is not necessary for the Weather
Data Link Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey, or the CEL MOV Softkey for the Weather Data Link Page.
To display the Cell Movement legend, (Figure 6-14), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cell Movement is
selected for display.
Figure 6-14 Cell Movement Legend
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETS (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather that is considered of extreme importance to all aircraft. A
Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position. SIGMET and AIRMET data display on the Weather
Data Link Page (Figure 6-15).
Sig/Air Data
Figure 6-15 SIG/AIR Data
6-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move it over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key.
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-16), select the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-16 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Figure 6-17 shows sample SIGMET text.
Figure 6-17 Sample SIGMET Text
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-15
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: The atmospheric pressure on the METAR is reported in hectopascals everywhere but in the US,
where it is reported in inches of mercury. Temperatures are reported in Celsius. Standard temperature and
atmospheric pressure are 15°C (59°F) and 29.92 in Hg (1013.2 hPa).
NOTE: METAR and City Forecast information is only displayed within the installed aviation database service
area.
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report) is the standard format for pre-flight weather briefings. METARs
are updated hourly and are considered current. A typical METAR report contains information about the
temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. It
can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs are shown
as colored flags at airports that provide them.
By contrast, the TAF (Terminal Aerodrome Report) is the standard format for 24-hour weather forecasts.
The TAF (Figure 6-18) may contain some METAR data, but it generally covers a smaller area. It typically
forecasts significant weather changes, temporary changes, probable changes, and expected changes in weather
conditions. METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Data Link Page and the Weather Information
Page.
Viewing METAR and TAF text for a selected airport:
1) On the Weather Data Link Page, press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Weather Information Page with METAR and TAF text.
OR:
1) Select the Weather Information Page and enter the desired airport.
a) Select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Select the first rectangular page icon.
c) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
d) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to display the cursor.
e) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
2) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
3) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page if the airport was selected by
panning from this page.
6-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METAR data is displayed first in a decoded fashion, then as raw text. TAF information is displayed only in
its raw form.
METAR
Text
METAR
Symbol
TAF
Text
Figure 6-18 METAR and TAF Text on the WPT - Weather Information Page
To display the METAR legend (Figure 6-19), press the LEGEND Softkey when METARs are selected for
display.
Figure 6-19 METAR Legend
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-17
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast information display together. They only display within the installed
Aviation Database service area.
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours (Figure 6-20 - 6-23). Surface Analysis and
City Forecast information display on the Weather Data Link Page.
6-18
Figure 6-20 Current Surface Analysis Data
Figure 6-21 12-Hour Surface Analysis Data
Figure 6-22 36-Hour Surface Analysis Data
Figure 6-23 48-Hour Surface Analysis Data
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes to reflect
the forecast time selected.
To display the Surface Analysis (Figure 6-24) and City Forecast legend, press the LEGEND Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-24 Surface Analysis Legend
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-19
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FREEZE LEVEL
Freeze Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-25). When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude has
not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next
update.
Figure 6-25 Freeze Level Data
Displaying Freeze Level information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
Freeze Level data displays on the Weather Data Link page only. It does not display on other G1000
maps.
To display the Freeze Level legend (Figure 6-26), press the LEGEND Softkey when Freeze Level is
selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-26 Freeze Level Legend
6-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WINDS ALOFT
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-27) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey.
a) Press the SFC Softkey to display the surface wind speed and directions.
b) Press any numbered softkey to display the winds at an altitude in 3,000 foot increments. The WIND Softkey
label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
c) Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to display additional altitude softkeys.
Figure 6-27 Winds Aloft Data at 27,000 Feet
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-21
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-28), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is
selected for display.
Figure 6-28- Winds Aloft with Legend
6-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY
County data (Figure 6-29) provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings from the
National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
flood conditions, and other natural disasters.
Flood Warning
Icon
Figure 6-29 County Flood Warning
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the COUNTY Softkey.
County warnings display only on the Weather Data Link Page. They do not display on other G1000
maps.
To display the County legend (Figure 6-30), press the LEGEND Softkey when County warnings are selected
to be displayed.
Figure 6-30 County Warnings Legend
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-23
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CYCLONE
Cyclone data shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes) and their projected track. The forecasted
track can be displayed at various time intervals.
Displaying Cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the CYCLONE Softkey.
Cyclone data displays only on the Weather Data Link Page. It does not display on other G1000 maps.
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-31), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be
displayed.
Figure 6-31 Cyclone Legend
SETTING UP THE WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
The display of weather data on the Weather Data Link Page can be set up and customized by using the Data
Link Menu (Figure 6-32). Weather legends for all active products can also be accessed from the Data Link
Menu.
Figure 6-32 Data Link Menu
6-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-33 shows the Data Link Setup Window. The ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ settings control the display of weather
products the same way that softkeys do.
Winds Aloft
Data Selected
Figure 6-33 Data Link Setup Window
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-25
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The selected range settings on the Data Link Setup Window control the largest map range at which each
weather product displays on the Weather Data Link Page. Table 6-3 lists every map range option for all XM
Satellite Weather products.
Data
Range Options (in nm unless otherwise indicated)
NEXRAD Data
10
15
20
30
50
80
100
150
200
300
500
800
1000
1500
2000
Echo Top Data
10
15
20
30
50
80
100
150
200
300
500
800
1000
1500
2000
Cloud Top Data
10
15
20
30
50
80
100
150
200
300
500
800
1000
1500
2000
LTNG Data
10
15
20
30
50
80
100
150
200
300
500
800
1000
1500
2000
CELL MOV Data
10
15
20
30
50
80
100
150
200
300
500
800
1000
1500
2000
SIG/AIR
10
15
20
30
50
80
100
150
200
300
500
800
1000
1500
2000
METAR Data
1
1.5
2
3
5
8
10
15
20
30
15
80
100
200
300
500
800
1000
1500
2000
3000
5000
SFC Data
10
15
20
30
50
80
100
150
200
300
500
800
1000
1500
2000
FRZ LVL Data
10
15
20
30
50
80
100
150
200
300
500
800
1000
1500
2000
WND ALF ALT
SURFACE
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
36000
39000
42000
COUNTY Data
10
15
20
30
50
80
100
150
200
300
500
800
1000
1500
2000
CYCLONE Data
10
15
20
30
50
80
100
150
200
300
500
800
1000
1500
2000
METAR (cont.)
Table 6-3 Map Range Settings
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
1) On the Weather Data Link Page, press the MENU Key.
2) While the Weather Setup selection is highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to highlight and move between the products.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to move between the options for each product (for example, ‘Yes’, ‘No’, or Map
Range).
5) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
6) Press the FMS CRSR Knob to return to the Weather Data Link page with the changed settings.
OR:
Press the MENU Key and then the ENT Key to restore the default settings.
6-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
MAP PANNING ON THE WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
Map panning (Figure 6-34) moves the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map range.
Press the Joystick to select the map panning feature.
Information
About Warning
Panning Arrow
Over a Tornado
Warning
Figure 6-34 Panning on the Weather Data Link Page
When map panning is enabled, a panning arrow flashes on the Weather Data Link Page. Panning over
AIRMETs, County Warnings, TFRs (Temporary Flight Restrictions), Echo Tops, METARs, SIGMETs, and
Cell Movement displays text information for the selection. This information is displayed in the same
location as the map pointer information on the Navigation Map Page.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-27
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SETTING UP XM WEATHER ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
When appropriately configured, the Navigation Map displays NEXRAD, Cell Movement, TFRs, and XM
Lightning data as shown in Figure 6-35. This improves situational awareness and makes it easier to relate
storm activity to airports, NAVAIDS, obstacles, and other ground references.
NEXRAD
Products, Storm
Legend, and Age
NEXRAD
Weather
500 nm Range
Indicator
Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page Displaying NEXRAD Weather
6-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
XM WEATHER ON THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Use the Map Setup Window (Figure 6-36) to customize the display of weather data on the Navigation Map
Page. The Map Setup Window settings control the display of weather data on all G1000 pages except the
Weather Data Link Page.
Figure 6-36 Map Setup Options
Setting up and customizing weather data on the Navigation Map Page:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) While the ‘Map Setup’ selection is highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather
Group’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
The following options are available (Figure 6-36):
• NEXRAD DATA – Turns the display of NEXRAD data and radar coverage on or off. Selects the display
range.
• NEXRD CELL MOV – Turns the display of storm cell movement on or off. Cell Movement is shown only when
NEXRAD is turned on.
• XM LTNG – Turns the display of XM Lightning on or off. Selects the display range.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-29
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 STORMSCOPE WX-500 SERIES II SENSOR
NOTE: The Stormscope system is not intended for hazardous thunderstorm penetration. Weather information
on the G1000 MFD is approved for weather avoidance only. Refer to the WX-500 User’s Guide for a detailed
description of Stormscope operation.
The following pages can display Stormscope data:
• PFD Inset Map
• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages
To display Stormscope data on any map besides the Stormscope Page, press the MAP Softkey (or the INSET
Softkey for the PFD Inset Map), then press the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data
using the yellow lightning strike symbology shown in Table 6-4.
Lightning Age
Symbol
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
Table 6-4 Lightning Age and Symbols
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-37), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’
(Figure 6-38), and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
6-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following options are available (Figure 6-38):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of Stormscope data on or off.
• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays.
Figure 6-37 Page Menu
Figure 6-38 Map Setup Menu
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-31
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-39). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Map
Orientation
Stormscope
Mode
Strike Rate
per Minute
Stormscope
Icon
30 nm Map
Range
Figure 6-39 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope
Lightning Data
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn
(Figure 6-40). This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the
nose of the aircraft.
6-32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope Lightning’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-40 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North Up orientation) on the
Navigation Map Page. However, in Track Up orientation at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning
data can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North Up orientation
shows all the data.
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present. The
presence of Stormscope lightning data is indicated by the annunciation ‘LTNG < 25 nm’ in the upper right
corner (Figure 6-41).
Figure 6-41 Lightning Display Range Annunciation
The maximum zoom range can also be set on the Navigation Map. Note that Stormscope data above the
selected maximum zoom range is decluttered.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-33
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in.
SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
If Stormscope is installed, the Stormscope Page is the third rectangular icon in the Map group of pages.
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) To change the map range, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
Mode
Strike Rate
Map Orientation
Figure 6-42 Stormscope Page
6-34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the Stormscope Page.
OR:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options.
4) When an item is selected, press the ENT Key.
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn
(Figure 6-43). This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the
nose of the aircraft.
Manually clearing Stormscope data:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Clear Stormscope Lightning’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
OR:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the CLEAR Softkey.
Figure 6-43 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-35
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚
viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
3) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the Stormscope Page.
OR:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘View Arc’ and ‘View 360˚ options.
4) When an item is selected, press the ENT Key.
STORMSCOPE OPERATION WITH LOSS OF HEADING INPUT
If heading is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This is to
ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
6-36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 TERRAIN PROXIMITY
WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75° North or 60° South.
NOTE: Terrain Proximity is only available when TAWS is not enabled.
G1000 Terrain Proximity is a non-TSO-C151b-certified terrain awareness system. It increases situational
awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT).
Do not confuse Terrain Proximity with Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more
sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations
or voice alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are within a certain
altitude threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS
uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
REQUIREMENTS
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
LIMITATIONS
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude
with reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they
are in the database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They
should never be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
GPS POSITION AND GPS-MSL ALTITUDE
The G1000 GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is
used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry,
but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors.
GPS-MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL
altitude source.
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain
Proximity feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-37
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous
terrain and obstacle conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA
TERRAIN PROXIMITY SYMBOLS
The symbols and colors in Figure 6-44 and Table 6-5 are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude
when the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to
represent terrain information relative to aircraft altitude.
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Figure 6-44 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
The color of each obstacle is associated with the altitude of the aircraft. The color of the terrain also uses these
color assignments.
Obstacle Symbol
Unlighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
Obstacle above or within 100
ft below the aircraft altitude
Obstacle between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft
altitude
Table 6-5 Terrain Proximity Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
6-38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following pages:
• Terrain Proximity Page
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map
• PFD Inset Map
• Flight Plan Pages
To display terrain and obstacle data on any page other than the Terrain Proximity Page:
1)
Press the MAP Softkey,
2)
Press the TERRAIN Softkey.
Obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet above ground level (AGL) are displayed in three color levels
(Table 6-6). The G1000 adjusts colors automatically as the aircraft altitude changes.
Terrain Proximity may also be deselected from the Inset Map without affecting the terrain display on the MFD
maps.
Obstacles are displayed only at certain map zoom ranges, on certain maps, and will only be displayed if an
obstacle database is loaded on the SD card. In addition, all map zoom ranges are dependent on the zoom range
setting in the Navigation Map. If the zoom range on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
zoom range on all other maps is also adjusted proportionally. Table 6-6 shows the highest zoom range at which
obstacles are displayed on each page.
Map
Range (nm)
Navigation Map Page
50
Inset Map
10
Terrain Proximity Page
10
AUX - Trip Planning Page
10
Active Flight Plan Pages
15
Table 6-6 Zoom Ranges for Displaying Obstacle Data
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-39
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
The Terrain Proximity Page is in the MAP group of pages and displays the following:
• Current aircraft location
• GPS-derived MSL altitude in increments of 20 feet or 10 meters, depending on unit configuration.
• Range marking rings (360º View: 1 nm, 1 and 2 nm, 2.5 and 5 nm, 5 and 10 nm, 12.5 and 25 nm, 25 and 50
nm, 50 and 100 nm, 100 and 200 nm) (Arc View: 1 nm, 2 nm, 5 nm, 10 nm, 25 nm, 25 and 50 nm, 25 and
100 nm, 25 and 200 nm)
• Map Orientation (North Up, Track Up, DTK Up, HDG Up) - Displays ‘HDG Up’ map data unless there is no
valid heading
• Terrain - Displays information relative to current aircraft altitude
• Terrain Legend - Indicates the terrain elevation in colors relative to the aircraft altitude
Displaying terrain and obstacles on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the last rectangular page icon.
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
There are two terrain/obstacle viewing options available (relative to the position of the aircraft), the 360°
default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display.
Map
Orientation
Aircraft
GPS-MSL
Altitude
Map Range
Rings
Black Terrain (Terrain
More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain (Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Red Terrain (Terrain
Above or Within 100’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-45 Terrain Proximity Page
6-40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Changing the viewing mode between 360° and ARC:
1) Select the Terrain Proximity Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey.
3) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
OR:
1) Press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with either ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’.
2) Press the ENT Key to change the view.
Red Terrain (Terrain
Above or Within 100’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Map Range
Yellow Terrain
(Terrain Between
100’ and 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Black Terrain (Terrain
More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-46 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)
Other aviation information such as airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDS can be displayed on the Terrain
Proximity Page.
Showing or hiding aviation information:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show (or Hide) Aviation Data’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-41
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Terrain and obstacle data can be displayed on the Navigation Map Page. Obstacles are shown on the Navigation
Map Page at or below the map range that is configured.
Displaying Terrain Proximity data on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display the terrain and obstacle data on the Navigation Map Page.
Displaying obstacle information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display the terrain and obstacle data on the Navigation Map Page.
3) Press the Joystick and move the panning arrow over the obstacle icon.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Panning Information
About Obstacle
Red Terrain
Area (Above
or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or
Within 100’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
Area (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Cursor Placed
on Lighted
Obstacle
Aircraft Symbol
Terrain Legend
Terrain Symbol
and Range
Figure 6-47 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
6-42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SETTING UP TERRAIN PROXIMITY ON THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Use the Map Setup Window (Figure 6-48) to customize the display of obstacle and terrain data on the
Navigation Map Page. Data displays only if it is enabled.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) While the ‘Map Setup’ selection is highlighted on the Page Menu, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. To select the ‘Map’ group, turn the FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key.
4) While the Map Setup Menu is displayed, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between ‘TERRAIN
DATA’ and ‘OBSTACLE DATA’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the zoom range at which terrain and obstacles begin to display on the
Navigation Map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through the ranges and press the ENT Key.
Map Zoom Range at
Which Data Begins to
Display
Figure 6-48 Map Setup Window
Refer to Table 6-5 for the altitudes associated with obstacle and terrain colors.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-43
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 TAWS
TAWS (Terrain Awareness and Warning System) is an feature to increase situational awareness and aid in
reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.
Class B TAWS is required for all Part 91 aircraft operations with six or more passenger seats and for Part 135
turbine aircraft operations with six to nine passenger seats (FAR Parts 91.223, 135.154).
TAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold
from the aircraft.
REQUIREMENTS
TAWS requires the following to operate properly:
• The system must have a valid 3-D GPS position solution.
• The system must have a valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database.
LIMITATIONS
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
TAWS displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft. The displayed alerts and
warnings are advisory in nature only. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database.
However, all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be inaccurate. Never use this
information for navigation or to maneuver to avoid obstacles.
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies.
Terrain information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. Never use it for navigation or to
maneuver to avoid terrain.
TAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. The data undergoes verification
by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content, per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should
never be understood as being all-inclusive.
COMPUTING GPS ALTITUDE FOR TAWS
TAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based
altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used to determine TAWS alerts. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by
factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude devices. GPS-MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain
and obstacle alerts.
6-44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS
position and GPS-MSL altitude, TAWS displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to
calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this
manner, TAWS can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions. Detailed alert modes
are described later in this section.
BARO-CORRECTED ALTITUDE VERSUS GPS-MSL ALTITUDE
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local
atmospheric conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating
the altimeter setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmosphere
conditions seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA)
model (where pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected
altitude (as read from the altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s
true altitude differing from the baro-corrected altitude.
USING TAWS
During G1000 power-up, the terrain/obstacle database versions are displayed along with a disclaimer to the
pilot. At the same time, TAWS self-test begins. One of the following aural messages is generated:
• “TAWS System Test OK”
• “TAWS System Failure”
TAWS information can be displayed on the following pages:
• TAWS Page
• Navigation Map
• PFD Inset Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Flight Plan Pages
TAWS can also be displayed on the PFD Inset Map by selecting the INSET Softkey, then the TERRAIN
Softkey. TAWS display may also be deselected from the Inset Map without affecting the display on the MFD
maps.
To display TAWS data on any page other than the TAWS Page, press the MAP Softkey, then press the TERRAIN
Softkey. Terrain and obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet above ground level (AGL) are displayed in
yellow and red (Table 6-7). The G1000 adjusts colors automatically as the aircraft altitude changes.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-45
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS PAGE
The TAWS Page is in the MAP group of pages and displays the following:
• GPS-derived MSL altitude in increments of 20 feet or 10 meters, depending on unit configuration
• Aircraft ground track
• Terrain Range - Indicates the terrain elevation in colors relative to the aircraft altitude
• Range marking rings (360º View: 1 nm, 1 and 2 nm, 2.5 and 5 nm, 5 and 10 nm, 12.5 and 25 nm, 25 and
50 nm, 50 and 100 nm, 100 and 200 nm) (Arc View: 1 nm, 2 nm, 5 nm, 10 nm, 25 nm, 25 and 50 nm, 25
and 100 nm, 25 and 200 nm)
• Heading Box (North Up, Track Up, DTK Up, HDG Up) - Heading on the TAWS Page displays ‘HDG Up’
map data, unless there is no valid heading
• Obstacles
• Potential Impact Points
Displaying the TAWS Page:
1) Select the NAV Page Group.
2) Select the last rectangular page icon.
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
Figure 6-49 TAWS Page (360˚ View)
The TAWS Page has two view settings:
• 360˚ View—Displays surrounding terrain and obstacles on all sides of aircraft (Figure 6-49).
6-46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• ARC (120˚) View—Displays terrain and obstacles ahead of and 60˚ to either side of the aircraft flight path
(Figure 6-50).
Changing the viewing mode between 360° and Arc:
1) Select the TAWS Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey.
3) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
OR:
1) Press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with either ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’. Press the ENT Key to
change the view.
2) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
Figure 6-50 TAWS Page (Arc˚ View)
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-47
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Other aviation information such as airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDS can be displayed or hidden on the
TAWS Page (Figure 6-51).
Showing or hiding aviation information:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show (or Hide) Aviation Data’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the CLR Key to toggle aviation information on or off.
Figure 6-51 TAWS Page Menu
TAWS MANUAL TEST
NOTE: TAWS System Testing is disabled when ground speed exceeds 30 knots in order not to impede TAWS
alerting.
TAWS provides a manual test which verifies the proper operation of the aural and visual annunciations of
the system prior to a flight.
Manually testing the TAWS System:
1) Select the TAWS Page and press the MENU Key.
2) Select the ‘Test TAWS’ option.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
One of the following aural messages is generated:
• “TAWS System Test OK”
• “TAWS System Failure”
TAWS TEST is annunciated in yellow on the TAWS Page and in white on the PFD.
6-48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS SYMBOLS
The symbols and colors in Figure 6-52 and Table 6-7 are used to represent obstacles and potential impact
points on the TAWS Page. TAWS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain information
relative to aircraft altitude.
Potential Impact Point
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Unlighted Obstacle
1000 ft
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Figure 6-52 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS
Obstacle Symbol
Each color is associated with an alert severity level. Terrain graphics and visual annunciations also use these
color assignments.
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’
AGL
< 1000’
AGL
> 1000’
AGL
> 1000’
AGL
Potential
Impact
Points
Obstacle Location
Alert Level
Obstacle at or within 100’
WARNING
below current aircraft altitude
Obstacle between 100’ and
1000’ below current aircraft
altitude
CAUTION
Table 6-7 TAWS Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Note that if an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms
in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS Page.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-49
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS ALERTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS software algorithms.
TAWS alerts typically employ either a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, visual annunciations are displayed. Aural alerts are simultaneously issued.
Annunciations appear in the lower right corner of the MFD display (Figure 6-53).
Annunciation
Figure 6-53 Pull-up Annunciation on the MFD
6-50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Annunciations also appear on the PFD (Figure 6-54).
Annunciation
Figure 6-54 ‘Pull Up’ Annunciation on the PFD
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-51
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The aural alert voice gender is configurable on the AUX - System Setup Page to be either male or female.
Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD.
Pop-up terrain alerts (Figure 6-55) can also appear on the MFD during an alert, but only when the TAWS
Page is not displayed. When an alert displays, the pilot can:
• Press the CLR Key. This acknowledges the pop-up alert and returns to the currently viewed page.
• Press the ENT Key. This acknowledges the pop-up alert and accesses the TAWS Page.
Figure 6-55 Alert Pop-up
Figure 6-56 Alert Pop-up
6-52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Table 6-8 shows the possible TAWS alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
NOTE: Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent.
Alert Type
PFD/MFD
TAWS Page
Annunciation
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
or
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
or
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
or
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
or
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
or
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
or
*
*
*
*
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
*
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up’
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
*
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
*
*
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
*
*
*
*
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
*
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)
“Sink Rate”
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
or
*
*
“Don’t Sink”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
* Indicates the default configuration
Table 6-8 TAWS Alerts Summary
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-53
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Table 6-9 shows system status annunciations that may also be issued:
PFD/MFD TAWS
Page
Annunciation
MFD
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
TAWS System Test Fail
None
“TAWS System Failure”
TAWS Alerting is disabled
None
None
No GPS position or excessively degraded
GPS signal
None
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” is generated when sufficient
GPS signal is re-established.
System Test in progress
None
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
Alert Type
None
System Test pass
Table 6-9 Additional System Annunciations
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) alert is used by TAWS and is composed of:
• RTC AND ROC
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) alerts are
issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum clearance
values in Table 6-10. When an RTC or ROC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS Page.
• ITI AND IOI
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the aircraft
is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Table 6-10.
Phase of Flight
Enroute
Terminal
Approach
Departure
Minimum Clearance
Minimum Clearance
Altitude Level Flight (ft) Altitude Descending (ft)
700
500
350
300
150
100
100
100
Table 6-10 Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values for FLTA Alerts
During the final approach phase of flight, FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is
below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or below 125 feet AGL while within 1.0
nm of the runway threshold.
6-54
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly below
the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-57).
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport. PDA alerting ends when
the aircraft is either:
• 0.5 nm from the runway threshold
OR
• at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 nm of the threshold.
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
“Too Low, Terrain”
200
100
Runway 1
Threshold
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Distance From Destination Airport (nm)
Figure 6-57 PDA Alerting Threshold
TAWS INHIBIT
TAWS also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the PDA/FLTA aural and visual alerts. Pilots should use
discretion when inhibiting TAWS and always remember to enable the system when appropriate. Only the
PDA and FLTA alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode. For more information, see the section on TAWS
alerts.
Inhibiting and enabling TAWS:
1) Select the TAWS Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey. To enable TAWS, press the INHIBIT Softkey again.
OR:
1) Press the MENU Key. ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ is highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The TAWS system is inhibited or enabled, depending on the previous status. The annunciation
is displayed in the terrain annunciator field whenever terrain is inhibited.
NOTE: If TAWS alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS approach, a
LOW ALT annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the altimeter if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet
below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-55
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-58 shows the parameters
for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
5000
4500
"
E
AT
R
K
4000
IN
"S
3500
3000
2500
2000
1500
"PULL UP"
1000
500
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
Descent Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-58 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
The purpose of the Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After
Takeoff”) is to provide suitable alerts to the pilot when the system determines that the aircraft is losing altitude
(closing upon terrain) after takeoff. The aural message “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by
an annunciation and a pop-up terrain alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from
an airport and when the following conditions are met:
• The height above the terrain is less than 700 feet.
• The distance from the departure airport is 2 nm or less.
• The heading change from the heading at the time of departure is less than 110 degrees.
6-56
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Figure 6-59 shows two figures which illustrate the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b.
The NCR alert is issued when the altitude loss and height are within the range in the first figure, or when
the sink rate (negative vertical speed) and height are within the range in the second figure.
1000
800
600
400
“DON’T SINK”
200
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Altitude Loss (Feet)
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
“DON’T SINK”
300
200
100
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Sink Rate (Feet Per Minute)
Figure 6-59 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Alert Criteria
‘FIVE-HUNDRED’ AURAL ALERT
The purpose of the aural alert message “Five-Hundred” is to provide an advisory alert to the pilot that the
aircraft is 500 feet above terrain. When the aircraft descends within 500 feet of terrain, the aural message
“Five-Hundred” is generated. There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the aural
message.
TAWS NOT AVAILABLE ALERT
TAWS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS Page. The aural message “TAWS Not
Available” is generated. When the GPS signal is re-established and the aircraft is within the database coverage
area, the aural message “TAWS Available” is generated.
TAWS FAILURE ALERT
TAWS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is
generated along with a ‘TAWS FAIL’ annunciation.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-57
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.5 TRAFFIC
There are two possible types of traffic system that could be installed on the aircraft. They are:
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
• Traffic Advisory System (TAS)
Determine what type is installed by looking at the traffic page softkeys as shown following:
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended to help the
pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS.
Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.
NOTE: TIS is disabled when a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.
TIS SYMBOLOGY
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help pilots detect and avoid aircraft intersecting their flight
paths. TIS uses the Mode S transponder for the traffic data link.
TIS receives traffic information from ground stations and provides a five-second update rate. The G1000
displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below to 3500 feet above the
requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology using four different symbols (Table
6-11).
6-58
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-11 TIS Symbol Descriptions
Proximity Advisories (PAs) are defined as traffic within the 5.0-nm range, within ±1200 feet of altitude
separation. They are not Traffic Advisories (TA), which alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic
meets the advisory criteria for the TA, a solid yellow circle symbol is generated.
The altitude difference between your aircraft and other aircraft is displayed either above or below the traffic
symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above your aircraft, the altitude data displays above the
traffic symbol. If the other aircraft is below your aircraft, the altitude data displays below the traffic symbol.
Altitude trend is displayed as an up or down arrow (±500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target
symbol. If the altitude trend is less than 500 fpm in either direction, no arrow displays. TIS also provides a
vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-59
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Operating
Mode
Non-Threat
Traffic
Proximity
Advisory, Aircraft
is 1700’ Above
and Descending
- Moving in the
Direction of the
Vector Line
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic Advisory,
“Non-Bearing” Traffic (System is
Aircraft is 400’
Unable to Determine Bearing), Aircraft Distance
Below and Climbing is 8.0 nm, 1100’ Above and Descending
Figure 6-60 Traffic Map Page - Advisories
TIS also displays non-bearing traffic, or traffic for which it is unable to determine the bearing. Non-bearing
traffic alert messages display in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
Traffic information can be displayed on the following pages:
• Traffic Map Page
• Navigation Map
• WPT - VOR Information Page
• PFD Inset Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages
• FPL - Active Flight Plan Page
To display traffic on any page other than the Traffic Map Page, press the MAP Softkey, followed by the
TRAFFIC Softkey.
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Select the Map Page Group.
2) Press the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘TIS OPERATING’ is displayed in the upper left corner of
the page. Alternatively, press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘TIS STANDBY’
displays in the upper left corner of the page.
4) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area. Map ranges
are 2 nm, 6 nm, and 12 nm.
6-60
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The Traffic Map Page is in the Map Group and displays the following information:
• Current aircraft location
• Surrounding TIS traffic
• Range marking rings - The range at which traffic is being displayed on the Traffic Map Page
• Current traffic mode - Indicates if TIS is in Standby or Operate mode
• Traffic alert message - Displays in yellow in the center of the Traffic Map Page
• Traffic status banner - Displays in the lower left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Current Traffic
Mode
Range
Marking
Rings
Surrounding Traffic
Surrounding
Traffic
Traffic Status Banner
Surrounding Traffic
Figure 6-61 Traffic Map Page
Surrounding Traffic
CURRENT TRAFFIC MODE
STANDBY AND OPERATE
Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to Operating mode. The G1000 displays ‘TIS
OPERATING’ in the upper left corner and begins to display traffic on the Traffic Map Page. TIS Traffic
Advisories (TA) are issued to alert the crew to intruding aircraft.
Once the aircraft is on the ground, TIS switches from operating mode to standby mode. The Traffic Map
Page displays ‘STANDBY’. The pilot can use the page menu or softkeys to switch between Standby (STBY)
and Operating (ON) modes and manually override automatic operation.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-61
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Switching between operating modes:
1) Select the Map Page Group.
2) Select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. ‘TIS STANDBY’ or ‘TIS OPERATING’ is
displayed in the status box in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
OR:
1) Press the MENU Key. The page menu displays ‘Standby Mode’ or ‘Operate Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
TRAFFIC ALERT MESSAGES
TIS POWER-UP TEST
The G1000 performs and automatic test during power-up. If TIS passes the power-up test, the standby
screen displays on the Traffic Map Page. If the aircraft is airborne during the test, traffic displays on the
Traffic Map Page.
If TIS fails the power up test, one of the following traffic alert messages display in yellow in the center of
the screen:
• NO DATA - Data is not being received from the transponder.
• DATA FAILED - Data is being received from the transponder, but a failure was detected in the data
stream.
• FAILED - The transponder has failed.
• UNAVAILABLE - The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
Contact the service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action all of these messages, except the
UNAVAILABLE message.
6-62
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TIS Has
Failed
No Data Being Received
from Transponder
Figure 6-62 Traffic Map Page Power-up Test
AUDIO ALERTS
An audio alert is generated whenever the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan
to the next. This reduces the amount of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft. For example, when the
first TA is displayed, an aural alert is generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional
alerts are generated. If a second TA appears on the display, a new audio alert is generated. If the number
of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another audio alert is generated.
An audio alert is also generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable. The volume of the audio alert
is configured during installation.
The following alerts are available:
• Traffic - Traffic alert is received
• TIS Not Available - TIS is not available or out of range
TRAFFIC STATUS BANNER
The traffic status is indicated in the Traffic Status Banner in the lower left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
More than one message can display at a time.
The following messages can display:
• AGE - If traffic data is not refreshed within six seconds, an age indicator (‘AGE MM:SS’) displays in the
lower left corner. If data is not received after another six seconds, the traffic is removed from the display.
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases.
• TRFC COAST - The displayed data is not current. It has been 12 to 60 seconds since the last message. The
quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message displays.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-63
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• TRFC RMVD - Traffic has been removed because it is too old to coast It has been 12 to 60 seconds since
the last message. There may be traffic, but it is not displayed.
• TA OFF SCALE - A traffic advisory is outside the selected display range. The off range banner is removed
when the traffic comes within the selected display range.
• TRFC FAIL - Traffic data has failed.
• NO TRFC DATA - Traffic has not been detected.
• TRFC UNAVAIL - The traffic service is unavailable or out of range.
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map:
1) On the Navigation Map, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-63), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Traffic’
(Figure 6-64), and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
The following options are available (Figure 6-64):
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display on the Navigation Map. Select from:
• All Traffic - Displays all traffic
• TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
• TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown on the Navigation Map
(from 500 ft to 300 nm)
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels display (from 500 ft to 300 nm, with
the option to disable)
Figure 6-63 Page Menu
6-64
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-64 Map Setup Menu
TIS LIMITATIONS
While the G1000 does not display indications for TIS availability, the service may be unavailable in the
radar coverage areas for any of the following reasons:
• Radar Out – The radar site may be out of service. If the TIS Mode S sensor is not operational, TIS is not
available.
• Out of Radar Range – Traffic beyond the maximum Mode S site range is not shown. If your own aircraft
or any other traffic is beyond the range of the TIS capable Mode S site, TIS is not available.
• Radar Cone of Silence – Whether your own aircraft or the other traffic is above the radar site in the cone
of silence and out of range of an adjacent site, TIS data is not received.
• Below Radar Coverage – If your aircraft or the other traffic is below radar coverage, it is not seen. In flat
terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000 feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the
radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all directions.
• No Transponder – Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS. Aircraft without altitude
reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-65
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
L-3 SKYWATCH TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM
NOTE: SKYWATCH Traffic Advisory System (TAS) takes priority over TIS services. If SKYWATCH is installed,
no TIS data is displayed.
USER-INITIATED TEST
SKYWATCH performs an initial self-test at power-up. In addition, it performs a continuous self-test several
times per minute. Refer to the L-3 Skywatch Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the SKY497 TAS
System.
Performing a user-initiated test:
1) With SKYWATCH in ‘Standby’ or ‘Failed’ mode, press the TEST Softkey.
2) If SKYWATCH successfully completes the test, the aural message “Traffic Alert System Test Passed” is generated.
SKYWATCH transitions to OPERATE mode.
3) If a failure is detected during the test, the aural message “Traffic Alert System Test Failed” is generated. The unit
reverts to STANDBY mode.
4) If the test fails, press the TEST Softkey again.
5) If the self-test fails again, refer to the L-3 Skywatch Pilot’s Guide.
Figure 6-65 shows the Traffic Map symbols that display when a user-initiated test is completed
successfully:
Figure 6-65 User-Initiated Test Results
6-66
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SKYWATCH TAS SYMBOLOGY
SKYWATCH uses the following Traffic Map symbols (Table 6-12):
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-12 TAS Symbol Descriptions
SWITCHING FROM STANDBY MODE
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed. The ability to switch out of standby into
operating mode on the ground is especially useful for scanning the airspace around the airport before
takeoff.
Switching to operating mode from standby mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, press the OPERATE Softkey.
OR:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Operating Mode’.
3) If ‘Operating Mode’ is selected from the FMS menu, press the ENT Key to confirm and place SKYWATCH in
operating mode.
4) To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page, press the STANDBY Softkey.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-67
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE DISPLAY MODE
Changing the altitude display mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following softkeys:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST
3) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Traffic Page.
OR:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNRESTRICTED
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Select the Map Page Group.
2) Select the second rectangular page icon.
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘TAS OPERATING’ is displayed in the upper left corner of
the page.
4) Press the ALT MODE Softkey to change the altitude volume.
5) Select the desired altitude volume by pressing the BELOW, NORMAL, ABOVE, or UNREST (unrestricted) Softkey.
The selection is displayed in the Altitude mode field in the upper left.
6) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘TAS STANDBY’ displays in the upper left
corner of the page.
7) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
6-68
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
Operating
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Advisory, Aircraft is
400’ Below and Climbing
“Non-Bearing” Traffic (System is Unable
to Determine Bearing), Distance is 8.0 nm,
1100’ Above and Descending
Traffic, Out of
Range
Proximity Traffic,
1000’ Above and
Descending
Figure 6-66 Traffic Map Page
NOTE: SKYWATCH altitude display range is indicated in hundreds of feet relative to the aircraft. In Figure
6-66, SKYWATCH indicates that the non-bearing intruder aircraft is at 1100 feet above the aircraft and
descending.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
6-69
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map:
1) Ensure that SKYWATCH is operating.
2) With the Navigation Map displayed, press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic displays on the Navigation Map (Figures 6-67).
Traffic Advisory
Non-Threat
Non-Bearing
Traffic Off
Traffic
Traffic Advisories Scale Banner
Figure 6-67 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
6.6 HAZARD DISPLAYS WITH LOSS OF GPS POSITION
If GPS position is lost, or becomes invalid, selected hazards being displayed on the Navigation Map Page will be
removed until GPS position is again established. The icons in the lower right of the screen, indicating the selected
functions for display, will show an ‘X’, as shown in Figure 6-68.
Figure 6-68 Loss of Hazard Functions with Loss of GPS Position
6-70
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for the installed autopilot.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
7-1
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
BLANK PAGE
7-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: The availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic form does not preclude the
requirement to carry paper charts aboard the aircraft. See AC 120-76A for more information.
Additional features of the G1000 include SafeTaxi™ diagrams, ChartView and FliteCharts™ electronic charts,
and XM Radio entertainment.
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 650 airports in the
United States. By zooming in on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the airport
layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
The optional XM Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver offers commercial-free
listening to entertainment audio. XM Radio offers more entertainment choices and longer range coverage than
commercial broadcast stations.
8.1 SAFETAXI
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when zooming in on airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When zoomed in close enough to show the
airport detail, the map reveals runways with numbers, taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the aircraft location is within the screen boundary, including within SafeTaxi ranges, an
airplane symbol is shown on any of the navigation map views for enhanced position awareness.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-1
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• NDB Information Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• VOR Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Airport Information Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Intersection Information Page
• Nearest Pages
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown in Figure 8-1, the aircraft is on Taxiway Charlie approaching the beginning of
runway 03.
Airport
Features
Taxiway
Identification
Aircraft
Position
Runway
Number
Figure 8-1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
DCLTR Softkey
Removes
Airport Runway
and Taxiway
Markings
Pressing the DCLTR Softkey (declutter) once removes the taxiway markings and airport identification labels.
Pressing the DCLTR Softkey twice removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection names if within
the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey a third time removes the airport runway layout, unless the
airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey again cycles back to the original
map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the GPS Navigation Section.
8-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Map Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-2 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to ‘SAFETAXI’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
SAFETAXI
Option
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
Figure 8-3 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-3
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SAFETAXI CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the G1000, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not
available. The Power-up Page shows the SafeTaxi database is current when the ‘SafeTaxi Expires’ date is shown
in white. When the SafeTaxi cycle has expired, the ‘SafeTaxi Expires’ date appears in yellow. The message
‘SafeTaxi: N/A’ appears in white if no SafeTaxi data is available on the database card (Figure 8-4).
SafeTaxi Database is Current
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Available
Figure 8-4 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
8-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date, and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page. SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The ‘EXPIRES’ date
appears in blue when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8-5 and 8-6). SafeTaxi ‘REGION
NOT AVAILABLE’ appears in blue if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8-6). Expired
SafeTaxi data is never disabled.
Press the DBASE Softkey for scrolling through the database information. Scroll through the database with
the FMS knob or ENT Key.
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in Figure 8-5, ‘07S1’ is broken down as follows:
07 – Indicates the year 2007
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
1 – Indicates the first issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
The SafeTaxi ‘EFFECTIVE’ date ‘18–JAN–07’ is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
‘EXPIRES’ date ‘15–MAR–07’ is the revision date for the next database cycle.
SafeTaxi Data
DBASE Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-5 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
The SafeTaxi database is provided by Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-5
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The other two possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-6. The ‘EFFECTIVE’ date
is the beginning date for this database cycle. ‘EXPIRES’ date is the revision date for the next database cycle.
‘NOT AVAILABLE’ indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
Figure 8-6 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Expired, SafeTaxi Not Available
8-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 CHARTVIEW
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view
of approach charts and on airport diagrams.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Airport Diagrams
• Arrivals (STAR)
• NOTAMs
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Approaches
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Flight
Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys (Figure 8-7) appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
SHW CHRT
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
ALL
HEADER
PLAN
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
Figure 8-7 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-7
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
OR:
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to ‘Show Chart’.
4) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Figure 8-8 Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner ‘CHART NOT AVAILABLE’ appears on the screen.
The ‘CHART NOT AVAILABLE’ banner does not refer to the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of
a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-9 Chart Not Available Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
‘UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART’ is then displayed.
Figure 8-10 Unable To Display Chart Banner
8-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available from the Navigation Map Page by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting
a Page Menu Option, charts may be obtained from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
Figure 8-11 Waypoint Information Page OPTIONS Menu
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the flight plan, it appears on the
screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the SHW CHRT
Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown will be one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page will appear. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the
airport is shown.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-9
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram will be displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box.
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu
Scroll Through
Entire Chart
With the
Joystick
Figure 8-12 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8-16). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner ‘CHART NOT TO SCALE’, the aircraft symbol will not
be shown. The Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
8-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Colorado Springs, CO (KCOS)
Airport Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
Figure 8-13 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-11
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If the
displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO Softkey will have no effect.
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within
the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Romeo on the Charlotte, NC
(KCLT) airport.
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS
Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering information;
the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and Airline
Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
Aircraft
Current
Position
Figure 8-14 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
8-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
In the example shown in Figure 8-14, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-15).
Figure 8-15 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Chart Not
To Scale
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-16 Departure Information Page
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-13
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Chart Not
To Scale
Zoom and Pan
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-17 Arrival Information Page
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
Figure 8-18 Approach Information Page
8-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM Weather subscription is current.
WX Info
When
Available
WX Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-19 Weather Information Page
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-15
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-19. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page, the Navigation Map Page, and all of the chart
page selections.
NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
Figure 8-20 NOTAM Softkey Highlighted
8-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-21 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-17
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-7).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the entire approach chart on the screen. By pressing the ALL Softkey from
another view, the approach chart is shown in its entirety.
Entire Chart
Shown
Figure 8-22 Approach Information Page, ALL View
8-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
Figure 8-23 Approach Information Page, Header View
Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
Approach
Chart Plan
View
Figure 8-24 Approach Information Page, Plan View
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-19
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
Figure 8-25 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
Figure 8-26 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
8-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WDTH Softkey changes
the chart size to fit the available screen width.
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-21
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey switches between showing only the chart and the chart plus the data window
at the right with the chart in the center.
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown.)
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Available
Information
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
with Info Window
Figure 8-28 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
8-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-29 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the ‘FULL SCREEN’ and ‘COLOR SCHEME’ Options (Figure 8-30).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the ‘On’ and ‘Off’ Full Screen Options.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, and ‘Night’ Options.
6) In Auto Mode, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field and change percentage with the small
FMS Knob. The percentage of change is the day/night crossover point based on backlighting intensity.
NOTE: Once an adjustment is made to the percentage field in Auto mode, the chart must be redrawn
(zoomed in or out, or another chart selected) before the switch from Day to Night is seen.
7) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-23
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-30 Arrival Information Page, Day View
Figure 8-31 Arrival Information Page, Night View
8-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from
the cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is
no longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the G1000, the Power-up
Page indicates any of nine different possible criteria for ChartView availability. See Table 8-1 for the various
ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition of each.
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. G1000 system is not configured for ChartView. Contact
a Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is
installed. Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new
cycle is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days
after expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for
viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or
G1000 has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle
number for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView will
not be available.
Table 8-1 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-25
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Examples of four possible Power-up Page conditions are shown in Figure 8-32. ‘ChartView Disables’ plus a
date in white, indicates chart data is current. This indication for normal operation shows how long the charts
may be viewed. ‘Chart data update available.’ in white, indicates the chart data cycle has expired within the
past week and the next chart cycle is available. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are still
viewable, but approaching the disable date. ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow, indicates the chart cycle has
expired and is no longer viewable.
ChartView Database is
Current and Available
Chart Cycle has Expired,
Next Cycle is Available
Chart Cycle has Expired but is Still Viewable
for 70 Days from Expiration Date
Chart Cycle is No
Longer Viewable
Figure 8-32 Examples of Power-up Page, ChartView Database
8-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
‘CYCLE’ number, ‘EXPIRES’, and ‘DISABLES’ dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView ‘EXPIRES’ date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is shown
as the ‘DISABLES’ date. When the ‘DISABLES’ date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing. The
SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is installed.
Press the DBASE Softkey for scrolling through the database information. Scroll through the database with
the FMS knob or ENT Key.
The ChartView database cycle number shown in Figure 8-33, ‘0619’ is broken down as follows:
06 – Indicates the year 2006
19 – Indicates the 19th issue of the ChartView database for the year
The ‘EXPIRES’ date “05–OCT–06” is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
The ‘DISABLES’ date “14–DEC–06” is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
ChartView
Data
DBASE Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-33 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-27
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The other three possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-34. The ‘EXPIRES’
date, in yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The ‘DISABLES’ date, in yellow, is the date that
this database cycle is no longer viewable. ‘REGION’ and ‘CYCLE’ ‘NOT AVAILABLE’ in blue, indicate that no
ChartView data is available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
ChartView Database has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Disabled
System is
Configured for
ChartView but
Database is not
Available
ChartView Database is Not Available
Figure 8-34 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Expired, ChartView Disabled, ChartView Not Available
8-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.3 FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of National Aeronautical Charting Office (NACO) terminal procedures
charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. FliteCharts database
subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Airport Diagrams
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page or Nearest
Airports Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the chart
selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and GO BACK. The chart
selection softkeys (Figure 8-35) appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
SHW CHRT
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
APR
WX
GO BACK
Presssing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
ALL
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
Figure 8-35 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-29
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
OR:
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to ‘Show Chart’.
4) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Figure 8-36 Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner ‘CHART NOT AVAILABLE’ appears on the screen.
The ‘CHART NOT AVAILABLE’ banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-37 Chart Not Available Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
‘UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART’ is then displayed.
Figure 8-38 Unable To Display Chart Banner
8-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available from the Navigation Map Page by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting
a Page Menu Option, charts may be obtained from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
Figure 8-39 Waypoint Information Page OPTIONS Menu
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the flight plan, it appears on the
screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the SHW CHRT
Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown will be one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page will appear. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the
airport is shown.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-31
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram will be displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box.
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Chart Not
To Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
Pan Entire
Chart With
the Joystick
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-40 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner ‘CHART NOT TO
SCALE’, and the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
8-32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
Navigation Map Page
and FiteCharts
Figure 8-41 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-33
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If the
displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO Softkey will have no effect.
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-41) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-42) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO
Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. The Charlotte,
NC airport has three additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate Minimums, and
Take-off Minimums.
Info Box
Selected
Figure 8-42 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
8-34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
In the example shown in Figure 8-42, ‘TAKE OFF MINIMUMS’ is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays
the Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-43).
Figure 8-43 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Figure 8-44 Departure Information Page
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-35
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Figure 8-45 Arrival Information Page
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
Figure 8-46 Approach Information Page
8-36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM Weather subscription is current.
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box. When the INFO Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are
blank.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Info Available
on This Airport
WX Info
When
Available
Chart Not
To Scale
Figure 8-47 Weather Information Page
WX Softkey
Selected
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-37
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-35).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the entire chart on the screen. By pressing the ALL Softkey from another
view, the approach chart is shown in its entirety.
Entire Chart
Shown
Figure 8-48 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
8-38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the FIT WDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the zoomed-in chart is replaced with the full width chart.
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-49 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-39
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey switches between showing the chart on the entire screen and including the
data window on the right with the chart in the center.
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
Figure 8-50 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
8-40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-51 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the ‘FULL SCREEN’ and ‘COLOR SCHEME’ Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the ‘On’ and ‘Off’ Full Screen Options.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, and ‘Night’ Options.
6) In Auto Mode, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field and change percentage with the small
FMS Knob. The percentage of change is the day/night crossover point based on backlighting intensity.
NOTE: Once an adjustment is made to the percentage field in Auto mode, the chart must be redrawn
(zoomed in or out, or another chart selected) before the switch from Day to Night is seen.
7) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-41
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-52 Approach Information Page, Day View
Figure 8-53 Approach Information Page, Night View
8-42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no
longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the G1000, the Power-up Page
indicates any of five different possible criteria for chart availability. These indications are whether the databases
are not configured, not available, current, out of date, or disabled. See Table 8-2 for the various FliteCharts
Power-up Page displays and the definition of each.
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. G1000 system is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact
a Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is
installed. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the
FliteCharts database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within
the 180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
Table 8-2 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-43
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Examples of four possible Power-up Page messages are shown in Figure 8-54. ‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a
date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are
still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FliteCharts Database is Current
and Available
FliteCharts Database is
Expired but Still Available
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
Figure 8-54 FliteCharts Power-up Page Messages
8-44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status Page. The FliteCharts
database ‘REGION’, ‘CYCLE’ number, ‘EFFECTIVE’, ‘EXPIRES’, and ‘DISABLES’ dates of the subscription appear
in either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is
not within the current subscription period.
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts ‘EXPIRES’ date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the ‘DISABLES’ date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
Press the DBASE Softkey for scrolling through the database information. Scroll through the database with
the FMS knob or ENT Key.
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in Figure 8-55, ‘0604’ is broken down as follows:
06 – Indicates the year 2006
04 – Indicates the fourth issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts ‘EFFECTIVE’ date “13–APR–06” is the first date that this database is current.
The FliteCharts ‘EXPIRES’ date “11–MAY–06” is the last date that this database is current.
The ‘DISABLES’ date “07–NOV–06” is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
FliteCharts
Data
Figure 8-55 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
DBASE Softkey
Selected
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-45
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The other three possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-56. The ‘EXPIRES’
date, in yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The ‘DISABLES’ date, in yellow, is the date
that this database cycle is no longer viewable. ‘REGION’ and ‘CYCLE’ ‘NOT AVAILABLE’ in blue, indicate that
FliteCharts database is not available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FliteCharts Database has Expired, but is not Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
System is
Configured for
FliteCharts but
Database is not
Installed
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
Figure 8-56 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Expired,
FliteCharts Disabled, FliteCharts Not Available
8-46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.4 XM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM Weather products.
The optional XM Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for the pilot’s and
passengers’ enjoyment. XM Radio can be received by subscription throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment
audio is not available on the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver. The XM Radio entertainment feature of the Data Link
Receiver is explained in this section.
XM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICE
XM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. Visit
www.xmradio.com for more information about XM Radio.
Entertainment audio must be set up with the MFD softkeys.
If problems occur, ensure that the owner/operator of the aircraft has subscribed to XM Radio service, and that
the XM subscription has been activated. If a failure still exists, elementary diagnostic checks of the datalink
receiver system are explained in Abnormal Operation at the end of this section.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-47
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
XM SERVICE ACTIVATION
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A
activation data when the XM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal XM Radio operation,
but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently selected during flight. Refer to the GDL 69/69A XM
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev F or later) for further information.
The XM Information Page provides XM Radio identification numbers, service level, and weather products.
Selecting the XM Information Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - XM Information Page (fifth page of six in the AUX Group). RADIO
and INFO Softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the INFO Softkey to show Radio IDs, Service Class, and Weather Products.
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
Weather
Products
Window
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
Figure 8-57 XM Information Page
LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial Setup
Each Data Link Receiver is assigned unique Data and Audio Radio IDs that allow XM to communicate with
the receiver. To activate XM service, the appropriate Radio ID(s) must be provided to XM to authorize the
installed services for that receiver. If XM weather services have not been activated, all the weather product
boxes are cleared on the XM Information Page and a yellow ‘Activation Required’ message shows up in the
center of the Weather Data Link Page (Map Page Group).
The ‘Service Class’ refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription.
8-48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
USING XM RADIO
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the XM Satellite
Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
3) Press the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
Active
Channel
Channel
List
Volume
Field
Categories
Field
Figure 8-58 XM Radio Page
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-49
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the XM Radio
is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Stepping through channels one at a time:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
OR:
2) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
3) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box will be highlighted.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
8-50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CATEGORY
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is ‘PRESETS’ to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
1) Select the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
OR:
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Categories’ list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS
Knob and press the ENT Key. Selecting ‘All Categories’ places all channels in the list.
Figure 8-59 Categories List
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-51
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
PRESETS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
4) Press the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
Press PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Press MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Press SET to
Save Each
Preset Channel
Figure 8-60 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels
VOLUME
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOL Softkey, which
brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
3) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to un-mute the audio.
Figure 8-61 Volume Control
8-52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.5 ABNORMAL OPERATION
Although it is the responsibility of the facility that installed the Data Link Receiver to correct any hardware
problems, some quick troubleshooting steps can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
First, ensure that the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed
to XM Radio, and that the XM subscription is activated. Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure
that power is applied to the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver. If a failure still exists, review the messages listed in
Table 8-3. The advisory messages may provide insight to a possible failure.
For troubleshooting purposes, the Status, Serial Number, and Software Version numbers for the Data Link
Receiver are displayed in the LRU Information Window on the System Status Page.
Selecting the System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
Figure 8-62 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
8-53
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Alerts Window Message
CHECK ANTENNA
UPDATING
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
OFF AIR
--ACTIVATION REQUIRED
GDL69A CONFIG
GDL69A FAIL
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error, service is required
Data Link Receiver is updating Encryption Code
Loss of Signal Message appears on XM Radio Page and on Weather Data Link
Page, when the signal strength is too low for the receiver
Acquiring Channel Audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing Channel Information
XM Data Link Receiver is not activated
Data Link Receiver configuration error, service is required
Data Link Receiver has failed, service is required
Table 8-3 GDL 69A Data Link Receiver Advisory Messages
8-54
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
NOTE: The Pilot’s Operating Handbook supersedes information found in this document.
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
Annunciation
Window
Alerts
Window
ALERTS Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 G1000 Alerting System
The G1000 Alerting System conveys alerts to the pilot using a combination of the following items:
• Annunciation Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. The Annunciation
Window is located to the right of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator on the PFD display (or the MFD if system
is in Reversionary Mode). Up to 12 PA32 annunciations can be displayed simultaneously. A white horizontal line
separates annunciations that are acknowledged from annunciations that are not yet acknowledged. Acknowledged
annunciations are always above the line. Annunciations are displayed in order of priority from top to bottom. The
highest priority annunciation is displayed at the top of the Annunciation Window.
• Alerts Window: The Alerts Window displays alert text messages. Up to 64 prioritized alerts can be displayed in the
Alerts Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey displays the Alerts Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey again removes
the Alerts Window from the display. When the Alerts Window is displayed, the pilot may use the large FMS Knob
to scroll through the alert list. Higher priority alerts are displayed at the top of the window. Lower priority alerts are
displayed at the bottom of the window. Active alerts are displayed in white text. Alerts that have become inactive will
change to gray text. The ALERTS Softkey will flash if the state of a displayed alert changes or a new alert is displayed.
The inactive alerts can be removed from the Alerts Window by pressing the flashing ALERTS Softkey.
• ALERTS Softkey Annunciation: When the Alerting System issues an alert, the ALERTS Softkey is used as a flashing
annunciation to accompany an alert. During the alert, the ALERTS Softkey assumes a new label consistent with alert
level (WARNING, CAUTION, or ADVISORY). Pressing the softkey annunciation acknowledges that the pilot is aware
of the alert. The softkey then returns to the previous ALERTS label. The pilot can then press the ALERTS Softkey
again to view alert text messages.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
A-1
APPENDIX A
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears in a window when a related LRU fails or detects invalid
data.
• Audio Alerting System: The G1000 system issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met. See the
Alert Levels Definitions section for more information.
ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS
The G1000 Alerting System, as installed in the Piper PA32 aircraft, uses three alert levels.
• WARNING: This level of alert requires immediate pilot attention. A warning alert is accompanied by an annunciation
in the Annunciation Window. Warning text appearing in the Annunciation Window is RED. A warning alert is also
accompanied by a flashing WARNING Softkey annunciation, as shown in Figure 12-2. Pressing the WARNING Softkey
acknowledges the presence of the warning alert and stops the aural tone, if applicable.
• CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require pilot
intervention. A caution alert is accompanied by an annunciation in the Annunciation Window. Caution text appearing
in the Annunciation Window is YELLOW. A caution alert is also accompanied by a flashing CAUTION Softkey
annunciation, as shown in Figure 12-3. Pressing the CAUTION Softkey acknowledges the presence of the caution
alert.
• MESSAGE ADVISORY: This level of alert provides general information to the pilot. A message advisory alert does not
issue annunciations in the Annunciation Window. Instead, message advisory alerts only issue a flashing ADVISORY
Softkey annunciation, as shown in Figure 12-4. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges the presence of the
message advisory alert and displays the alert text message in the Alerts Window.
Figure A-2 WARNING Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-3 CAUTION Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-4 ADVISORY Softkey
Annunciation
A-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
AIRCRAFT ALERTS
The following alerts are configured specifically for the Piper PA32 aircraft. See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook for
information regarding pilot responses.
WARNING ALERTS
Annunciation Window Text
OIL PRES LO
OIL PRES HI
ALTNTR INOP
NO STBY ALT
STARTER ENGD
ESS BUS LOW
EMER BAT LOW
Alerts Window Message
Oil pressure is below 25 psi.
Oil pressure is above 115 psi.
No output from main alternator.
No output from standby alternator.
Starter is engaged.
Essential bus voltage is less than 24.5V.
Emergency battery is voltage is low.
Audio Alert
Continuous Aural Tone
CAUTION ALERTS
Annunciation Window Text
BAGGAGE DOOR
AIR COND DR
EMER BAT LOW
PITOT FAIL
PITOT OFF
FLAPS
SHED LOAD
Alerts Window Message
Baggage door is open.
Air conditioning door is open.
Emergency battery state of charge less than 75 percent.
Pitot heat is inoperative.
Pitot heat is off.
Flap position and flap setting do not agree.
Shed electrical load. (Issued again 5 minutes after
initially displayed and acknowledged.)
Audio Alert
Single Aural Tone
ANNUNCIATION ADVISORY
Annunciation Window Text
STBY ALT ON
DISPLAY FAN
AVIONICS FAN
EMER BAT NC
AIR COND DR
ADF FAN
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Alerts Window Message
Standby alternator on.
The cooling fan for the display is inoperative.
The cooling fan for the remote avionics is inop.
The emergency battery is not charging.
Air conditioning door is operating properly.
The ADF cooling fan is inoperative. (Only available when
ADF is installed.)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
Audio Alert
None
A-3
APPENDIX A
TAWS ALERTS
Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD.
PFD/MFD TAWS
MFD Map Page
Alert Type
Page
Pop-Up Alert
Annunciation
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Warning (RTC)
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Caution
(RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Too Low, Terrain”
Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
None
None
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
or
A-4
Aural Message
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
“Don’t Sink”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
TAWS SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
PFD/MFD TAWS
Page
Annunciation
MFD
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
TAWS System Test Fail
None
“TAWS System Failure”
TAWS Alerting is disabled
None
None
No GPS position or excessively degraded
GPS signal
None
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Availble” will be heard when sufficient
GPS signal is re-established.
System Test in progress
None
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
Alert Type
System Test pass
None
OTHER G1000 AURAL ALERTS
Aural Alert
Description
“Minimums, minimums” The aircraft has descended below the preset barometric minimum descent altitude.
“Traffic”
“TIS not available”
The Traffic Information Service (TIS) has issued a Traffic Advisory alert.
The aircraft is outside the Traffic Information Service (TIS) coverage area.
G1000 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
This section describes various G1000 system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU
or an LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation
as shown previously in the G1000 System Annunciation section.
NOTE: This section provides information regarding G1000 message advisories that may be displayed by the system.
Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must be considered
when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The Piper PA32 Pilot’s Operating Handbook
(POH) takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
A red ‘X’ may be the result of an LRU or an LRU function failure. The Figure 12-5 illustrates all possible flags
and the responsible LRUs.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
A-5
APPENDIX A
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
GRS 77 AHRS
OR
GMU 44
Magnetometer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Unit
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
Figure 12-5 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
System Annunciation
GTX 33
Transponder
OR
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
Comment
Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning.
Display system is not receiving attitude information from the AHRS.
A-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
System Annunciation
Comment
Indicates a configuration module failure.
This annunciation will only be seen when the autopilot is engaged. The
annunciation indicates an AHRS monitor has detected an abnormal
flight parameter, possibly caused by strong turbulence. In this case, the
situation should correct itself within a few seconds. If there is an actual
failure, a red “X” will soon appear over the Attitude Indicator.
Display system is not receiving airspeed input from air data computer.
Display is not receiving altitude input from the air data computer.
Display is not receiving vertical speed input from the air data computer.
GPS information is either not present or is invalid for navigation use.
Note that AHRS utilizes GPS inputs during normal operation. AHRS operation may be degraded if GPS signals are not present (see POH).
Display is not receiving valid heading input from AHRS.
Display is not receiving valid transponder information.
Other Various Red X Indications
190-00692-00 Rev. B
A red ‘X’ through any other display field, such as engine instrumentation
fields, indicates that the field is not receiving valid data.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
A-7
APPENDIX A
MESSAGE ADVISORY ALERTS
Alerts Window Message
PFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative.
MFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the MFD is inoperative.
GIA FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the GIAs is inoperative.
Audio Alert
None
MFD & PFD MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 “KEY” KEYSTK – Key is stuck.
MFD1 “KEY” KEYSTK – Key is stuck.
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings.
The pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by
dimming the display. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by
pressing it several times. The G1000 system should be serviced if the problem
persists.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
The PFD and/or MFD voltage is low. The G1000 system should be serviced.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
A-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 aviation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 aviation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 SafeTaxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 SafeTaxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
DB MISMATCH – Aviation database
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
DB MISMATCH – Aviation database
type mismatch. Xtalk is off.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
type mismatch. Xtalk is off.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the aviation database. Attempt to
reload the aviation database. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be
serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the
terrain card is properly inserted. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the
G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database. Ensure
that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists,
the G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional
feature). Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If
problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional
feature). Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If
problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
The PFD and MFD have different aviation database versions installed. Crossfill is
off. Install correct aviation database version in both displays.
The PFD and MFD have different aviation database types installed (Americas,
European, etc.). Crossfill is off. Install correct aviation database type in both
displays.
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions installed. Crossfill is
off. Install correct terrain database version in both displays.
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database types installed. Crossfill is off.
Install correct terrain database type in both displays.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
A-9
APPENDIX A
DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Message
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database
version mismatch. Xtalk is off
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
database mismatch. Xtalk is off
Comments
The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions installed. Crossfill is
off. Install correct obstacle database version in both displays.
The PFD and MFD have different airport terrain databases installed. Crossfill is
off. Install correct airport terrain database in both displays.
GMA 1347 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 configuration The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration
error. Config service req’d.
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
mismatch. Communication halted.
serviced.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions
service. Return unit for repair.
may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The G1000 system
should be serviced when possible.
GIA 63W MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
A-10
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The G1000
system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
GIA 63W MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Message
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The G1000
system should be serviced.
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is WAAS capable.
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2.
The transmitter will operate at reduced power. If the problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2
may still be usable. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
A-11
APPENDIX A
GIA 63W MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Message
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded. Use LNAV minima.
TRUE APR – True north approach. All
angles are TRUE.
GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is inoperative.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
Use LNAV minima when approach is downgraded.
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav
angle is set to ‘AUTO’.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver is
unavailable. The G1000 system should be serviced.
GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is inoperative.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
Comments
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may
still be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may
still be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or
“pressed”) state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the
problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The
receiver may still be available. The G1000 system should be serviced when
possible.
GEA 71 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
A-12
Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
GTX 33 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup
configuration memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
GPS source.
G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check POH
any GPS information.
limitations. The G1000 system should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The G1000 system should
backup GPS information.
be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field
model needs update.
model when practical.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/ The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading
South, no magnetic compass.
is flagged as invalid.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
mismatch. Communication halted.
serviced.
GMU 44 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS
uses GPS for backup mode operation. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
A-13
APPENDIX A
GDL 69A MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69
configuration error. Config service
req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
Comments
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The
G1000 system should be serviced
MANIFEST – GDL software mismatch. The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
Communication halted.
serviced.
GDC 74A MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
Comments
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
Comments
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the G1000 system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is
is locked.
locked. This occurs when an aviation database update eliminates an obsolete
waypoint. The flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this
message. This can also occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
waypoint moved.
aviation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been
Verify user modified procedures.
manually edited. This alert is issued only after an aviation database update.
Verify that the user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up
to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer
Verify stored airways.
consistent with the aviation database. This alert is issued only after an aviation
database update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways
as needed.
A-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Message
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
truncated.
Comments
This occurs when a newly installed aviation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is
removed from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan
with current waypoint.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
LEG UNSMOOTH – Flight plan leg will
not be smooth.
APPR INACTV – Approach is not
active.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
PTK FAIL – Bad geometry, parallel
offset not activated.
PTK FAIL – Invalid leg type, parallel
offset not activated.
PTK FAIL – Past IAF, parallel offset not
activated.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
The approaching flight plan waypoints are too close to allow for smooth turns.
Prepare for steep turns ahead and expect noticeable course deviations.
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate
approach when required.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate
NAV receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the
CDI to the correct NAV receiver.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system will automatically transition to
the next vertical waypoint.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
A-15
APPENDIX A
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Message
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg
type in flight plan.
Comments
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This will prevent vertical guidance to
the active vertical waypoint.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
angle error.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
selected.
NO WGS84 WPT – Non WGS 84
waypoint for navigation -[xxxx]
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
failed.
FAILED PATH – A data path has failed..
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic
variance. Verify all course angles.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
A-16
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to
go invalid.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
The selected waypoint [xxxx] does not use the WGS 84 datum. Cross-check
position with alternate navigation sources.
The G1000 is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
Stormscope has failed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63/W has failed.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles
may differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
Message criteria entered by the user.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX B
SD CARD USE
The G1000 System uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight
operations, SD cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen aviation and ChartView database
updates.
JEPPESEN DATABASES
The Jeppesen aviation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a 14day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will no
longer function.
Both these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen. The ChartView database should be copied to the
Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside in the bottom card slot on the MFD. The aviation
database may be installed from the Jeppesen supplied SD data card or copied to one of the Garmin supplied
Supplemental Data Cards. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
The aviation database may be programmed to only one of the Supplemental Data Cards. This card must then
be used to update the PFD and the MFD.
NOTE: After the aviation database is installed, the card may be removed after loading the update to each
LRU.
Updating the Jeppesen aviation database:
1) With the G1000 System OFF, insert the SD card containing the aviation database update into the top card slot
of the PFD to be updated (Label of SD card facing left).
2) Turn the G1000 System ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the PFD:
Figure B-1 Database Update Prompt
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
B-1
APPENDIX B
3) Press the ENT Key to start the database update. A prompt similar to the following is displayed:
Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation
4) After the update completes, the PFD starts in normal mode.
5) Turn the G1000 System OFF and remove the SD card.
6) Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the MFD. The MFD and PFD databases are now updated. Remove the SD card
when finished.
7) Verify that the correct update cycle is loaded during startup of the MFD.
GARMIN DATABASES
The following G1000 databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Expanded basemap
• Obstacle
• Terrain
• SafeTaxi
• Airport terrain
• FliteCharts
A Supplemental Data Card should be inserted into the bottom card slot of the PFD and the MFD and not
removed except for updating the card. If one of the Supplemental Data Cards contains the ChartView database,
or the FliteCharts database, this card must be inserted into the bottom card slot on the MFD.
Since these databases are not stored internally in the MFD or PFD, a Supplemental Data Card containing
identical database versions must be kept in each display unit.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
The terrain and airport terrain databases contain the terrain mapping and airport diagram data. They are
updated periodically and have no expiration date.
B-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX B
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
UPDATING GARMIN DATABASES
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (www.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the
new databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards. Equipment required to perform the update is as
follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000 or XP recommended)
• SanDisk SD Card Reader, P/Ns SDDR-93 or SDDR-99 or equivalent card reader
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Existing 010-00330-42 Supplemental Database SD Cards from both PFD and MFD
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
B-3
APPENDIX B
After the data has been copied to the appropriate data cards, perform the following steps:
1) Insert one SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD and one in the bottom card slot of each PFD. The SD card
containing the ChartView or FliteCharts database must be inserted into the bottom slot on the MFD.
2) Apply power to the G1000 System. View the MFD power-up splash screen. Check that the databases are
initialized and displayed on the splash screen. When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, an ‘in
progress’ message may be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish loading before verifying
the correct databases are initialized, then proceed to step 3.
Figure B-3 Database Information on the Splash Screen
3) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
6) Press the DBASE Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘DATABASE’ box.
7) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the database list and check that all databases are current and there are
no errors.
8) Power down the G1000.
B-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX C
GLOSSARY
ACC
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
AF
AFCS
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRMET
ALRT
ALT
ALT, ALTN
AMPS
ANNUNC
ANT
AP
AP DISC
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AWOS
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing
BFO
190-00692-00 Rev. B
accuracy
active, activate
air data computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Arc to fix
Automatic Flight Control System
airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference
System
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
alert
altitude
alternator
amperes
annunciation
antenna
autopilot
autopilot disconnect
approach
airport, aerodrome
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
arrival
airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated
Surface
Observing
System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information
Service
along-track
automatic sequence
auxiliary
Automated Weather Observing
System
barometric altitude
barometric setting
battery
backcourse
The compass direction from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
beat frequency oscillator
BKSP
BRG
C
ºC
CA
CALC
Calibrated Airspeed
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CHT
CHKLIST
CHNL
CI
CLD
CLR
cm
CNS
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course
Course to Steer
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack Error
CRS
CRS
CRSR
CTA
CTRL
Cumulative
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
backspace
bearing
center runway
degrees Celsius
Course to Altitude
calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Course to DME distance
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix
Cylinder Head Temperature
checklist
channel
Course to Intercept
cloud
clear
centimeter
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
carbon monoxide
communication radio
configuration
coolant
co-pilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or
stay on course. Provides the most
efficient heading to get back to the
desired course and proceed along
the flight plan.
Course to Radial
Cockpit Reference Guide
current
The distance the aircraft is off a
desired course in either direction, left
or right.
course
Course to Steer
cursor
Control Area
control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Recorder
coverage
control wheel steering
cylinder
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
C-1
APPENDIX C
D ALT
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
deg
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
density altitude
database
decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)
declutter
decrease fuel
degree
de-icing
departure
The desired course between the
active “from” and “to” waypoints.
DEST
destination
DF
Direct to Fix
DFLT
default
DGRD
degrade
DH
decision height
Dilution of Precision A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry,
where higher numbers equal poorer
geometry).
DIR
direction
DIS
distance
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
DME
Distance Measuring Equipment
DOP
Dilution of Precision
DP
Departure Procedure
DPRT
departure
DR
dead reckoning
DSBL
disabled
DTK
Desired Track
E
ECU
Efficiency
EGT
EIS
ELEV
ELEV
EMERGCY
EMI
ENDUR
Endurance
ENG
C-2
empty, east
Engine Control Unit
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of
fuel.
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication System
elevation
elevator
emergency
Electromagnetic Interference
endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible
flight time based on available fuel on
board.
engine
ENGD
engaged
ENR
enroute
Enroute Safe Altitude The recommended minimum altitude
within ten miles left or right of the
desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to.
ENT
enter
EPE
Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR
error
ESA
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Position Error A measure of horizontal GPS
position error derived by satellite
geometry conditions and other
factors.
Estimated Time of Arrival The estimated time at which the
aircraft should reach the destination
waypoint, based upon current speed
and track.
Estimated Time Enroute The estimated time it takes to
reach the destination waypoint from
the present position, based upon
current ground speed.
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
Estimated Time Enroute
EXPIRD
expired
ºF
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
FD
FDE
FFLOW
FIS-B
FISDL
FL
FLC
FM
FMS
FOB
FPL
fpm
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
failure
Course From Fix to Distance
Federal Communication Commission
forecast
Course From Fix to DME Distance
flight director
Fault Detection and Exclusion
fuel flow
Flight
Information
ServicesBroadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
flight level
Flight Level Change
Course From Fix to Manual
Termination
Flight Management System
Fuel On Board
flight plan
feet per minute
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX C
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Fuel Flow
Fuel On Board
G/S, GS
GA
gal, gl
GBOX
GDC
GDL
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
GLS
GMA
GMT
GMU
GND
gph
GPS
Grid MORA
Groundspeed
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GTX
HA
HDG
Heading
HF
HFOM
Hg
190-00692-00 Rev. B
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units
of fuel per hour.
The total amount of usable fuel on
board the aircraft.
glideslope
go-around
gallon(s)
gearbox
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
ground
gallons per hour
Global Positioning System
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude;
one degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the
highest elevation reference point in
the grid by 1000 feet for all areas of
the grid
The velocity that the aircraft is
travelling relative to a ground
position.
see Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground speed
Garmin Transponder
Hold Terminating at Altitude
heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a
magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro.
Hold Terminating at Fix
Horizontal Figure of Merit
mercury
HI
high
HI SENS
High Sensitivity
HM
Hold with Manual Termination
Horizontal Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in
the aircraft’s horizontal position.
hPa
hectopascal
HPL
Horizontal Protection Level
hr
hour
HSDB
High-Speed Data Bus
HSI
Horizontal Situation Indicator
HT
heat
HUL
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hz
Hertz
I
Inner Marker
IAF
Initial Approach Fix
IAT
Indicated Air Temperature
IAU
Integrated Avionics Unit
ICAO
International
Civil
Aviation
Organization
ICS
Intercom System
ID
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
IDENT, IDNT
identification
IF
Initial Fix
IFR
Instrument Flight Rules
IG
Imperial gallon
ILS
Instrument Landing System
IMC
Instrument
Meteorological
Conditions
in
inch
INACTV
inactive
INC FUEL
increase fuel
IND
indicated
Indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation
on the aircraft panel.
INFO
information
in HG
inches of mercury
INT
intersection(s)
INTEG
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
IrDA, IRDA
Infrared Data Association
KEYSTK
kg
kHz
km
kt
key stuck
kilogram
kilohertz
kilometer
knot
L
LAT
LBL
left, left runway
latitude
label
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
C-3
APPENDIX C
lb
pound
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LCL
local
LED
Light Emitting Diode
Left Over Fuel On Board The amount of fuel remaining
on board after the completion of
one or more legs of a flight plan or
direct-to.
Left Over Fuel Reserve The amount of flight time remaining,
based on the amount of fuel on
board after the completion of one or
more legs of a flight plan or directto, and a known consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between
two waypoints.
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
LO
low
LOC
localizer
LOI
loss of integrity (GPS)
LON
longitude
LPV
Localizer Performance with Vertical
guidance
LRU
Line Replacement Unit
LT
left
LTNG
lightning
LVL
level
M
m
MAG
MAG VAR
MAHP
MAN IN
MAN SQ
MAP
MASQ
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
MET
METAR
MEPT
MFD
MGRS
MHz
MIC
MIN
C-4
Middle Marker
meter
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
Missed Approach Hold Point
manifold pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
maximum
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric
minimum
descent
altitude
manual electric trim
Meteorological Aviation Routine
manual electric pitch trim
Multi Function Display
Military Grid Reference System
megahertz
microphone
minimum
Minimum Safe Altitude
Uses Grid MORAs to determine
a safe altitude within ten miles of
the aircraft present position.
MKR
marker beacon
MOA
Military Operations Area
MOV
movement
mpm
meters per minute
MSA
Minimum Safe Altitude
MSG
message
MSL
Mean Sea Level
MT
meter
mV
millivolt(s)
MVFR
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
N
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
nm
NPT
NRST
north
navigation
NAVigation AID
Non-directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
nautical mile(s)
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OXY
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
offset
oxygen
P ALT
PA
PA
PASS
PC
PFD
PI
PIT, PTCH
POSN
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
psi
PT
PTK
PTT
PWR
pressure altitude
Passenger Address
Proximity Advisory
passenger(s)
personal computer
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
pitch
position
parts per million
Present Position
pressure
procedure(s), procedure turn
pounds per square inch
Procedure Turn
parallel track
Push-to-Talk
power
QTY
quantity
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
nearest
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX C
R
RAD
RAIM
RAM
REF
REM
REQ
RES
REV
RF
RMI
RMT
RNG
RNWY
ROL
ROM
rpm
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RX
S
SA
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
sec
SEL, SLCT
SFC
SIAP
SID
SIGMET
Sim
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
190-00692-00 Rev. B
right, right runway
radial
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
random access memory
reference
remaining (fuel remaining above
Reserve)
required
reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
reverse, revision, revise
Constant Radius Turn to Fix
Radio Magnetic Indicator
remote
range
runway
roll
read only memory
revolutions per minute
reset fuel
reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
right
reversionary
receive
south
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based
Augmentation
System
Storm Cell Identification and
Tracking
Secure Digital
second(s)
select
surface
Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant
Meteorological
Information
simulator
slip/skid
symbol
speed
Special Position Identification
speaker
squelch
SRVC, SVC
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SUSP
SW
SYS
service
stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
suspend
software
system
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAS
TRG
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURN
TX
true
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System, true
airspeed
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning
System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
telephone
temperature
terminal
Track Between Two Fixes
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement
relative to a ground position; also
‘Ground Track’
The angle difference between the
desired track and the current track.
target
track
Terminal Radar Service Area
truncated
total
procedure turn
transmit
UNAVAIL
unavailable
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
T HDG
TIS
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
Topo
Track
Track Angle Error
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
C-5
APPENDIX C
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator / Universal Polar Stereographic Grid
V, Vspeed
velocity (airspeed)
VA
Heading Vector to Altitude
VAPP
VOR approach
VAR
variation
VD
Heading Vector to DME Distance
Vdc
volts, direct current
VERT
vertical
Vertical Figure of Merit
A measure of the uncertainty in the aircraft’s vertical position.
Vertical Speed Required The vertical speed necessary to descend/climb from a current position and altitude to a defined
target position and altitude, based upon current groundspeed.
VFOM
Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VHF
Very High Frequency
VI
Heading Vector to Intercept
VLOC
VOR/Localizer Receiver
VM
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
VMC
Visual Meteorological Conditions
VNAV, VNV
vertical navigation
VOL
volume
VOR
VHF Omni-directional Range
VORTAC
very high frequency omnidirectional range station and tactical air navigation
VPL
Vertical Protection Level
VPROF
VNV profile, vertical profile
VPTH
VNV path, vertical path
VR
Heading Vector to Radial
VS
vertical speed
VSI
Vertical Speed Indicator
VSR
Vertical Speed Required
VTF
vector to final
C-6
W
WAAS
WARN
WGS-84
WPT
WW
WX
watt(s), west
Wide Area Augmentation System
warning (GPS position error)
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
world wide
weather
XFER, XFR
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
transfer
transponder
cross-talk
cross-track
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX D
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
If a particular aspect of G1000 operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
WHAT IS WAAS?
The Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through one of two geostationary satellites. This correction information can then
be received by any WAAS-enabled GPS receiver.
WAAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to
rely on GPS for all phases of flight. WAAS is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and
Hawaii.
HOW DOES WAAS AFFECT APPROACH OPERATIONS?
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of WAAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the WAAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
WHAT IS RAIM AND HOW DOES IT AFFECT APPROACH OPERATIONS?
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
D-1
APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
G1000 System monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A).
Without RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF,
the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure.
WHY ARE THERE NOT ANY APPROACHES AVAILABLE FOR A FLIGHT PLAN?
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the G1000 indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
WHAT HAPPENS WHEN AN APPROACH IS SELECTED? CAN A FLIGHT PLAN WITH AN APPROACH, A DEPARTURE, OR AN
ARRIVAL BE STORED?
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original en route portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
G1000 System automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should
an approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
CAN “SLANT GOLF” (“/G”) BE FILED USING THE G1000?
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G1000 System meets the requirements of TSO-C129 Class A1
or A2 installation. Non-precision GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the
approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more
information.
WHAT DOES THE OBS SOFTKEY DO?
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the G1000 automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
D-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX D
Normal (OBS not activated)
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints
OBS
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected
waypoint
• Manual course change on HSI not possible
• Manually select course to waypoint from
HSI
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
• Must be in this mode for final approach
course
• Cannot be set for final approach course or
published holding patterns
When OBS mode is active, the G1000 allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The G1000 suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the G1000 from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
WHY DOES THE G1000 NOT AUTOMATICALLY SEQUENCE TO THE NEXT WAYPOINT?
The G1000 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no “OBS” or
‘SUSP’ annunciation). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the “bisector” of the turn
being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs at an
equal angle from each leg.
HOW CAN A WAYPOINT BE SKIPPED IN AN APPROACH, A DEPARTURE, OR AN ARRIVAL?
The G1000 allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS
then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
WHEN DOES TURN ANTICIPATION BEGIN?
The G1000 smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
D-3
APPENDIX D
WHEN DOES THE CDI SCALE CHANGE?
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight. CDI scaling changes in the following circumstances:
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• Thirty nautical miles from the departure airport (or at the last departure waypoint if farther than 30 nm
from the departure airport), the system automatically selects the enroute phase of flight and changes the CDI
scaling to 2.0 nm.
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not been activated, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm to
1.0 nm.
• During approach operations, the CDI scale begins to ramps down further within 2.0 nm of the final approach
fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically once any portion of the approach procedure
becomes active or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
See the discussion on CDI scaling in the Flight Instruments section for more details.
WHY DOES THE HSI NOT RESPOND LIKE A VOR WHEN OBS MODE IS ACTIVE?
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
WHAT IS THE CORRECT MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURE? HOW IS THE MISSED APPROACH HOLDING POINT SELECTED?
To comply with TSO specifications, the G1000 does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
AFTER A MISSED APPROACH, HOW CAN THE SAME APPROACH BE RE-SELECTED? HOW CAN A NEW APPROACH BE
ACTIVATED?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The G1000 directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
D-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX D
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The G1000 provides navigation
along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘SELECT APPROACH’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the
desired transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
D-5
APPENDIX D
BLANK PAGE
D-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX E
GENERAL TIS INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS.
The Traffic Information Service (TIS) provides traffic advisory information to non-TAS/TCAS-equipped
aircraft. TIS is a ground-based service providing the relative locations of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C
transponder equipped aircraft within a specified service volume. The TIS ground sensor uses real-time track
reports to generate traffic notification. The G1000 System displays TIS traffic information on the Traffic Map
Page of the MFD. TIS information may also be displayed for overlay on the MFD Navigation Map Page, as
well as on the PFD Inset Map. Surveillance data includes all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage
volume. The G1000 System displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5 nm radius, from 3,000 feet below,
to 3,500 feet above the requesting aircraft.
TIS VS. TAS/TCAS
The Traffic Information System (TIS) is a ground-based service that requires contact with a ground station
through a datalink radio in order to receive traffic information. Traffic Advisory (TAS) and Traffic Collision
Avoidance Systems (TCAS) are self-contained. TAS/TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a half-second
update rate, while TIS utilizes the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and accompanying data link to provide
a five-second update rate. TIS and TAS/TCAS have similar ranges.
TIS LIMITATIONS
NOTE: TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot of the
responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS shall not be used for avoidance maneuvers during
instrument meterorlogical conditions (IMC) or when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft.
NOTE: Refer to the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for a more
comprehensive explanation.
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system, which is a “secondary surveillance” radar system similar
to that used by ATCRBS. Many limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. Information provided
by TIS is neither better nor more accurate than the information used by ATC. TIS is intended only to assist in
visual acquisition of other aircraft in visual meterological conditions (VMC). While TIS is a useful aid for visual
traffic avoidance, system limitations must be considered to ensure proper use. No recommended avoidance
maneuvers are given, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory.
• TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.
• TIS is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communications between the aircraft and the Mode-S radar
antenna. Whenever the structure of the aircraft comes between the transponder antenna and the groundbased radar antenna, the signal may be temporarily interrupted.
• Other limitations and anomalies associated with TIS are described in the AIM.
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
E-1
APPENDIX E
WARNING: Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Operation of the ground stations
is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to the AIM for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.
NOTE: TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the United States. This is often the case in
mountainous regions.
TIS information is collected during a single radar sweep. Collected information is then sent through the
Mode S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of this, the surveillance information is approximately five
seconds old. TIS ground station tracking software uses prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay.
These algorithms use track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time of
display. Occasionally, aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation and create slight errors on
the Traffic Map Page. Errors affect relative bearing information and target track vector. This can cause a delay in
the displayed intruder information. However, intruder distance and altitude typically remain relatively accurate
and may be used to assist in spotting traffic.
The following errors are common examples:
• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm may report
incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that intercepts the client aircraft course at a shallow angle
(either overtaking or head-on) and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0.25 nm, TIS may display
the intruder aircraft on the incorrect side of the client aircraft.
These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved within a few radar sweeps once the client/intruder
aircraft course stabilizes.
Pilots using TIS can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting observations
of undesirable performance. Reports should identify the time of observation, location, type and identity of
the aircraft, and describe the condition observed. Reports should also include the type of transponder and
transponder software version. Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel, not ATC,
malfunctions should be reported in the following ways:
• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility
• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report (postage-paid card can be obtained at FAA FSSs, General
Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Base Operators)
E-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX F
DISPLAY SYMBOLS
AIRPORT
BASEMAP
Item
Symbol
Item
Symbol
Item
Symbol
Interstate Highway
Unknown Airport
State Highway
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
US Highway
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
National Highway
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
Small City or Town
Towered, Serviced Airport
Medium City
Restricted (Private) Airport
Large City
Heliport
TRAFFIC
NAVAIDS
Item
Symbol
Intersection
Non-Threat Traffic (hollow diamond)
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
NDB (Non-directional Radio Beacon)
VOR
VOR/DME
Proximity Advisory
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
Traffic Advisory
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
TACAN
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
F-1
APPENDIX F
LINE SYMBOLS
Item
Symbol
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
Mode C Tower Area
Warning Area
Alert Area
Caution Area
Danger Area
Prohibited Area
Restricted Area
Training Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
Military Operations Area (MOA)
State or Province Border
International Border
Road
Railroad
Lattitude/Longitude
OBSTACLE DATABASE
Obstacle Symbol
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL
Obstacle
Color
Obstacle Location
Red
Obstacle within 100 ft or
above aircraft altitude
Yellow
Obstacle within 1000 ft of
aircraft altitude
Gray
Obstacle more than 1000
ft below aircraft altitude
Table F-1 Obstacle Symbols and Colors
F-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX F
TERRAIN COLOR CHART
Potential Impact Point
Projected Flight Path
100' Threshold
Unlighted Obstacle
1000'
Terrain Color
Red (WARNING)
Yellow (CAUTION)
Black (NO DANGER)
Terrain Location
Terrain at or within 100 ft below aircraft altitude
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft of aircraft altitude
Terrain more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Potential Impact Points
Figure F-2 TAWS Symbols & Colors
MISCELLANEOUS
Item
Symbol
Item
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
User Waypoint
Default Map Pointer
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Elevation Pointer
Parallel Track Waypoint
Wind Vector
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Measuring Pointer
Top of Descent (TOD)
Overzoom Indicator
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
Terrain Proximity or TAWS Enabled
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
Symbol
Traffic Enabled
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
F-3
APPENDIX F
BLANK PAGE
F-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
INDEX
A
Abnormal Operation--------------------------------------8-53
Active Channel --------------------------------------------8-50
Active Frequency ------------------------------------ 4-6, 4-15
ADF Audio -------------------------------------------------4-16
ADVISORY--------------------------------------------------- A-1
Advisory alerts---------------------------------------------- A-8
AHRS -------------------------------------------- A-6, A-7, A-13
Aircraft alerts ----------------------------------------------- A-2
Airport
Information ------------------------------------- 5-54, 5-65
Nearest ------------------------------------------ 5-64–5-65
Runway ------------------------------------------ 5-45, 5-55
Airspace
Boundary ------------------------------------------------5-17
Airspeed Indicator ------------------------------2-2, 2-4–2-5
Airspeed Trend Vector ------------------------------------- 2-4
Air Data Computer ---------------------------------------- 1-1
Alerting System -------------------------------------------- A-1
Alerts -------------------------------------------------------- A-1
Airspace -------------------------------------------------1-33
Audio voice ---------------------------------------------1-35
Alerts Window---------------------------------------------2-25
Alert levels -------------------------------------------------- A-2
ALL Softkey --------------------------- 8-7, 8-18, 8-29, 8-38
ALT -------------------------------------------------- 5-117, A-3
Altimeter -----------------------------------------2-2, 2-7–2-8
Altitude
Alerting --------------------------------------------------2-27
Buffer ----------------------------------------------------1-34
Altitude constraints ------------------------------5-91, 5-107
Altitude restrictions ---------------------------------------5-92
ALT knob ---------------------------------------------------- 1-9
ALT Softkey-------------------------------------------------4-26
Ammeter ----------------------------------3-2, 3-4, 3-7, 3-12
Annunciations ---------------------------------------------- A-1
G1000 System ------------------------------------------1-17
Softkey ---------------------------------------------------2-25
Test tone-------------------------------------------------1-37
Annunciation Window -----------------------------------2-25
Annunciator Lights ---------------------------------------4-32
Approach ---------------------------------------------------- D-2
Activate ------------------------------------------------ 5-145
Select--------------------------------------------------- 5-144
Approach Box ---------------------------------------------8-32
APR Softkey ------------------ 5-138, 8-7, 8-14, 8-29, 8-36
Arrival
Remove ------------------------------------------------ 5-139
Select--------------------------------------------------- 5-143
Attitude------------------------------------------------------ 1-1
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) --- 1-13,
1-15–1-16
Attitude Indicator -------------------------------------2-2, 2-6
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Audio alerting system ------------------------------------- A-2
Audio Panel ------------------------------------------------1-15
Audio Panel Controls
SPKR -----------------------------------------------------4-32
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation ------------------------4-39
Auto-Tuning -----------------------------------------------4-22
COM ------------------------------------------------------ 4-9
NAV ------------------------------------------------------4-18
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) --------------- 7-1
Automatic Squelch----------------------------------------4-14
Auto zoom -------------------------------------------------- 5-7
Auxiliary Pages (AUX) ------------------------------------1-27
AUX - System Status Page ---- 8-5, 8-6, 8-27, 8-28, 8-45,
8-46
Aviation map data -------------------------------- 5-16–5-17
B
BACK Softkey ------------------ 4-25, 8-7, 8-22, 8-29, 8-40
Barometric setting, Altimeter------------------2-2, 2-8–2-9
Bearing/distance, measuring ----------------------------5-27
Bearing information ------------------------------ 2-12–2-13
BKSP Softkey ----------------------------------------------4-25
C
Caution ------------------------------------------------ A-1, A-2
CDI -------------- 5-98, 5-106, 5-113, 5-119, 5-136, A-15
CDI Softkey ------------------------------------------------4-15
CELL MOV Softkey ----------------------------------------6-13
Channel List -----------------------------------------------8-49
Chart
Options ------------------------------------------ 8-18, 8-38
Setup Box --------------------------------------- 8-23, 8-41
Setup Menu ---------------------------------------------8-41
ChartView ------------------------------- 5-28, 8-1, 8-7, 8-27
Database ------------------------------------------------8-27
Functions ------------------------------------------------- 8-7
PLAN Softkey -------------------------------------------8-19
Plan View ------------------------------------------------8-19
Profile View ---------------------------------------------8-20
Subscription ---------------------------------------------8-27
Chart banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE ------------------------- 8-8, 8-30
CHART NOT TO SCALE ------------------------ 8-10, 8-32
CHRT OPT Softkey ------------------- 8-7, 8-18, 8-29, 8-38
CHRT Softkey ------------------------- 8-7, 8-11, 8-29, 8-33
CLD TOP Softkey ------------------------------------------6-11
CLR Key ----------------------------------------------- 1-8, 4-31
Code Selection Softkeys ------------------------- 4-25, 4-28
CODE Softkey -------------------------------------- 4-25, 4-29
COM
1/2 Key---------------------------------------------------4-36
Channel spacing ------------------------------- 1-36, 4-13
Frequency Box -------------------------------- 2-2, 4-3, 4-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
I-1
INDEX
Tuning failure -------------------------------------------4-39
Tuning Knob --------------------------------------------- 4-8
Volume/Squelch Knob ---------------------------------4-14
Controls
Softkeys ------------------------------------------ 1-17–1-20
COPLT Key --------------------------------------------------4-33
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) -- 1-36, 2-2, 2-14–2-15
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) ---------- 3-2, 3-6, 3-10
D
Databases -------------------------------------1-12, 1-13, B-1
Data Bar fields --------------------------------------------1-35
Data link ---------------------------------------------------- 1-1
Date and time ---------------------------------------------1-32
Day/Night Views ---------------------------------- 8-23, 8-41
Day View -----------------------------8-23, 8-24, 8-41, 8-42
DBASE Softkey -------------------------------------- 8-5, 8-45
DCLTR Softkey ---------------------------------------------- 8-2
Dead Reckoning ---------------------------- 2-12, 2-14, 2-29
Decision Height (DH) ------------------------------- 2-3, 2-28
Declutter ---------------------------------------------------5-30
Levels ----------------------------------------------------5-24
Departure
Select------------------------------------------ 5-131, 5-142
Departure Procedure Chart ------------------------------8-35
Digital audio entertainment ------------------------------ 1-4
Direct-to -------------------------- 5-38, 5-39, 5-105, 5-107
Direct-to navigation --------------------------------------5-65
Cancel ---------------------------------------------------5-35
Select course --------------------------------------------5-35
DISPLAY BACKUP -----------------------------------------4-39
Display backup --------------------------------------------1-15
DME
Audio ----------------------------------------------------4-16
HOLD mode ---------------------------------------------4-24
Information Window ----------------------------- 2-3, 2-13
NAV1 mode ---------------------------------------------4-24
NAV2 mode ---------------------------------------------4-24
Tuning mode --------------------------------------------4-24
Tuning Window -----------------------------------------4-24
DP Softkey ---------------------------- 8-7, 8-13, 8-29, 8-35
DR ------------------------------------------------------------ A-3
E
ECHO TOP Softkey ----------------------------------------6-10
Electrical ---------------------------------------- 3-2, 3-4, 3-12
Emergency Frequency ------------------------------------4-39
Endurance, calculated --------------------------------3-4, 3-7
Engine
Leaning ----------------------------------------------3-6, 3-9
Manifold pressure ------------------- 3-2, 3-4, 3-10, 3-12
Engine Indication System (EIS) --------------------3-1–3-14
I-2
Entering Flight ID -----------------------------------------4-25
Entertainment Inputs -------------------------------------4-37
ENT Key ----------------------------------------------------- 4-3
Ethernet ----------------------------------------------------- 1-2
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) -------3-2, 3-4, 3-6, 3-10
F
FIT WDTH Softkey -------------------- 8-7, 8-21, 8-29, 8-39
Flight ID ----------------------------------------------------4-31
Flight plan
Active ----------------------------------------------------5-16
Closest point to reference -------------------------- 5-127
Invert --------------------------------------------------- 5-126
Storing ---------------------------------------------------- D-2
FliteCharts ------------------------------------8-1, 8-29, 8-43
Cycle -----------------------------------------------------8-45
Expiration------------------------------------------------8-45
Functions ------------------------------------------------8-29
FMS Knob -------------------------------------------- 4-3, 4-31
FPL key ------------------------------------------------------ 1-8
Frequency
Nearest --------------------------------------------------5-59
Spacing --------------------------------------------------4-13
Transfer Arrow ------------------------------------------- 4-7
Transfer Key ---------------------------------------------- 1-8
Frequently asked questions------------------------------- D-1
Fuel
Calculations --------------------------------- 3-4, 3-7, 3-12
Flow ----------------------------------- 3-2, 3-4, 3-10, 3-12
Flow totalizer ------------------------------------- 3-7, 3-12
Planning -------------------------------------------------5-29
Quantity ------------------------------ 3-2, 3-4, 3-10, 3-12
Range ring ----------------------------------------------5-15
Remaining, calculated --------------------- 3-4, 3-7, 3-12
Used, calculated ---------------------------- 3-4, 3-7, 3-12
FULL SCN Softkey -------------------- 8-7, 8-22, 8-29, 8-40
G
GDC 74A ---------------------------------------------------- 1-1
GDL 69/69A -------------------------------------------1-1, 6-1
GDU 1040 -------------------------------------------------- 1-1
GEA 71 ------------------------------------------------------ 1-1
GIA 63 ------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
Glidepath------------------------------------------------- 5-117
Glidepath Indicator ---------------------------------------- 2-9
Glideslope ------------------------------------------------ 5-117
Glideslope Indicator ----------------------------------2-3, 2-9
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation -------------------- 5-32–5-137, 5-40–5-145
GMA 1347 ------------------------------------------- 1-1, 1-38
GMU 44 ----------------------------------------------------- 1-1
GO BACK Softkey -------------------- 8-7, 8-17, 8-29, 8-37
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
INDEX
GRS 77 ------------------------------------------------------ 1-1
GTX 33 -------------------------------------------------1-1, 1-4
GTX 33 Transponder -------------------------------- 4-1, 4-25
H
HEADER Softkey------------------------------------- 8-7, 8-19
Heading -------------------------------------- 2-2, 2-10–2-11
Heading Select --------------------------------------------- 1-8
HI SENS -----------------------------------------------------4-23
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) -------------- 2-2, 2-10
HSI Double Green Arrow---------------------------------4-15
HSI Magenta Arrow --------------------------------------4-15
HSI Single Green Arrow ----------------------------------4-15
I
IDENT Function --------------------------------------------4-31
IDENT Softkey ------------------------------ 4-25, 4-27, 4-30
ID Indicator ------------------------------------------------4-17
INFO Box ---------------------------------------------------8-34
INFO Softkey -------------------------- 8-7, 8-12, 8-29, 8-34
Inset Map ------------------------------------ 2-3, 5-29–5-30
Intercom System (ICS) ------------------------------------4-37
Intersection
Information ------------------------------------- 5-47–5-48
Nearest --------------------------------------------------5-56
IOI ----------------------------------------------------- 6-53, A-4
J
Jeppesen aviation database ------------------------------ B-1
Joystick --------------------------------------------- 8-10, 8-32
K
Key(s) --------------------------------------------- 1-7, 1-8, 1-9
L
Land map data --------------------------------------------5-21
LD APR Softkey ------------------------------------------ 5-138
Leaning, engine ---------------------------------------3-6, 3-9
LNAV ------------------------------------------------ 5-98, A-12
LO SENS ----------------------------------------------------4-23
LPV -------------------------------------------------5-98, 5-119
LRU Information Window --------------------------------8-53
M
Magnetometer --------------------------------------------- 1-1
Map
Pages -----------------------------------------------------1-26
Panning --------------------------------------------------5-24
Scale -----------------------------------------------------5-23
Marker Beacon --------------------------------------------4-23
Annunciations ------------------------------------------2-26
190-00692-00 Rev. B
MASQ Processing ------------------------------------------ 4-1
Measurement units, changing displayed --------------1-32
Menus ------------------------------------------------------1-25
Messages --------------------------------------------------- A-1
Message Advisories
Database ------------------------------------------A-9, A-10
Definition ------------------------------------------------- A-2
GDL 69A ------------------------------------------------ A-14
GDL 74A ------------------------------------------------ A-14
GEA 71 ------------------------------------------------- A-12
GIA 63W ---------------------------------A-10, A-11, A-12
GMA 1347 --------------------------------------------- A-10
GMU 44 ------------------------------------------------ A-13
GRS 77-------------------------------------------------- A-13
GTX 33 ------------------------------------------------- A-13
MFD & PFD ----------------------------------------------- A-8
Miscellaneous ---------------------------A-14, A-15, A-16
MFD Data Bar fields --------------------------------------1-35
MINIMUMS Softkey -------------------------------- 8-7, 8-20
Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) --------------- 2-3, 2-28
MKR/MUTE ------------------------------------------------4-23
Mode S --------------------------------------------- 4-25, 4-26
Mode Selection Softkeys ------------------ 4-25, 4-26, 4-28
MORE Softkey ---------------------------------------------8-52
Morse Code Identifier ------------------------------------4-17
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Softkeys --------------------------------------------------1-23
Music 1/Music 2 ------------------------------------------4-37
N
National Weather Service --------------------------------6-23
NAV
Frequency Box --------------------------------------2-2, 4-3
Radio selection -----------------------------------------4-15
Tuning Knob --------------------------------------------4-17
NAV1/NAV2 Audio----------------------------------------4-16
Navigation
Database --------------------------------- 5-91, 5-92, 5-98
Data Bar -------------------------------------------------5-27
Map ------------------------------ 5-23–5-146, 5-37, 6-29
Map Setup ----------------------------------------5-4–5-18
Mode Selection -----------------------------------------4-15
Source-------------------------------------------- 2-14–2-16
Status Bar ------------------------------------------------ 2-2
NDB
Nearest --------------------------------------------------5-57
Nearest
Airports --------------------------------------------------1-36
Intersection ---------------------------------------------5-56
NDB ------------------------------------------------------5-57
VOR ---------------------------------------------- 5-58–5-59
Nearest Airports, Frequency Tuning --------------------- 4-9
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
I-3
INDEX
Nearest Pages (NRST) ------------------------------------1-28
NEXRAD Softkey ------------------------------------------- 6-6
Night View ---------------------------8-23, 8-24, 8-41, 8-42
Normal display operation --------------------------------1-14
NOTAM Softkey ------------------------------8-7, 8-16, 8-17
NRST Softkey ----------------------------------------------5-65
O
Obstacles ------------------------------------------- A-10, A-11
Obstacle map data ---------------------------------------5-14
Oil pressure ------------------------------------ 3-2, 3-4, 3-12
Oil temperature ------------------------------- 3-2, 3-4, 3-12
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- D-2–D-3
Orientation, map ------------------------------------------- 5-6
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) ------------------- 2-2, 2-23
Overview ---------------------------------------------------- 1-1
P
Page groups --------------------------------------- 1-26–1-29
Pan map -------------------------------------------- 5-25, 5-30
Passenger Address ----------------------------------------4-35
PA Key ------------------------------------------------------- 4-6
PA System --------------------------------------------------4-35
PILOT/PASS Knob --------------------------------- 4-34, 4-38
Pilot Key ----------------------------------------------------4-33
Pilot profiles --------------------------------------- 1-30–1-31
Pitch indication --------------------------------------------- 2-6
PLAN Softkey ----------------------------------------------- 8-7
Power-up
Page ---------------------------------------------- 8-26, 8-44
Splash screen -------------------------------------------1-13
System ---------------------------------------------------1-13
Power ON Settings----------------------------------------4-32
Presets ------------------------------------------------------8-52
PRESETS Softkey ------------------------------------------8-52
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
Softkeys ------------------------------------------ 1-17–1-19
Procedures --5-142–5-145, 5-143–5-146, 5-144–5-146
PROC Key --------------------------------------------------- 1-9
PROFILE Softkey ------------------------------------- 8-7, 8-20
Q
Quick Tuning 121.500 MHz ------------------------------ 4-8
R
RADIO Softkey ---------------------------------------------8-49
Range -------------------------------------------------------5-12
Range, calculated -------------------------------------3-4, 3-7
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) -- D-1
Required Vertical Speed -------------------------------- 5-111
Required Vertical Speed Indicator -------------------- 5-111
Reversionary Mode ------------------------------- 1-14, 4-39
I-4
ROC --------------------------------------------------- 6-53, A-4
Roll indication ---------------------------------------------- 2-6
RS-232--------------------------------------------------1-3, 1-4
RS-485------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
Runway
Information ---------------------------------------------5-55
Minimum length----------------------------------------1-37
Surface ---------------------------------------------------1-36
RVSI ---------------------------------------------- 5-111, 5-112
RX Indicator ------------------------------------------------ 4-7
S
SafeTaxi------------------------------------- 8-1, 8-2, 8-4, 8-5
Database --------------------------------------------8-5, 8-6
Range ----------------------------------------------------- 8-3
Secure Digital (SD) card ---------------------------- 1-12, B-1
Selected
Altitude -------------------------------------- 2-2, 2-7, 2-27
Course ------------------------------ 2-3, 2-10–2-11, 2-19
Heading-------------------------------------------- 2-3, 2-10
Selecting Additional Information -----------------------8-37
Selecting a Chart ---------------------------------- 8-10, 8-32
Selecting a COM Radio ----------------------------------- 4-6
Sequencing, automatic ------------------------------------ D-3
Service Class -----------------------------------------------8-48
Setting a Preset Channel --------------------------------8-52
SHW CHRT Softkey --------------------------------- 8-9, 8-31
Slip/Skid Indicator-------------------------------------2-2, 2-6
Softkeys
EIS -------------------------------------------- 3-1, 3-7, 3-12
PFD -------------------------------------------------------- 2-2
Softkey annunciations ------------------------------------2-25
Speaker -----------------------------------------------------4-32
SPKR Key ---------------------------------------------------4-32
Splash screen, power-up ---------------------------------1-13
Split COM Operation -------------------------------------4-36
SQ Annunciation ------------------------------------------4-34
Standby Frequency ---------------------------- 4-6, 4-9, 4-15
Standby Frequency Field ---------------------------------- 4-6
STAR Softkey-------------------------- 8-7, 8-14, 8-29, 8-36
STBY Softkey -----------------------------------------------4-27
Stereo Headsets -------------------------------------------4-32
Storm cells -------------------------------------------------6-14
Stuck Microphone ----------------------------------------4-39
Suspend, waypoint sequencing -------------------------2-20
Symbols, map ------------------------------------------------F-1
System
Annunciations ------------------------------------ 1-17, A-2
Message advisories ------------------------------------- A-5
Power-up ------------------------------------------------1-13
Setup Page ----------------------------------------------1-30
Status Page ------------------------------------- 1-37, 8-53
Time -----------------------------------------1-32, 2-2, 2-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
INDEX
T
Tachometer ----------------------------- 3-2, 3-4, 3-10, 3-12
TAS -------------------------------------------------- 6-58, A-13
TAWS ------------------------------ 6-53, 6-54, A-3, A-4, A-5
Terminal Procedures Charts ----------------------- 8-8, 8-30
Terrain -----------------------------------6-70, A-4, A-9, A-10
Terrain map data ---------------------------------- 5-13–5-14
Time, system -----------------------------------------------1-32
Timer, PFD generic ----------------------------------------2-21
TIS -----------------------------------------------------------6-58
TOD ------------------------------------- 5-111, 5-112, 5-116
Topographic map data --------------------5-12–5-13, 5-26
Top of Descent --------------------------------- 5-111, 5-112
Track --------------------------------------------------------2-10
Track vector ------------------------------------------------5-10
Traffic Annunciation -------------------------------- 2-3, 2-26
Traffic Information Service (TIS) ---------------------E-1–E-2
Voice alerts ----------------------------------------------2-26
Transponder
Code Entry ----------------------------------------------4-28
Data Box---------------------------------------------4-1, 4-3
Ground Mode -------------------------------------------4-26
Mode Field -------------------------------------- 4-26, 4-27
Standby Mode ------------------------------------------4-27
Status Box ------------------------------------------------ 2-2
Troubleshooting the Data Link Receiver ---------------8-53
True airspeed ------------------------------------------2-2, 2-4
Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) ------------- 3-2, 3-6, 3-10
Turn anticipation ------------------------------------------- D-3
Turn Rate Indicator --------------------------------- 2-2, 2-12
TX Indicator ------------------------------------------------- 4-7
U
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART ---------------------- 8-8, 8-30
Updating Garmin Databases ----------------------------- 8-5
Updating Jeppesen Databases --------------------------8-27
Using XM Radio -------------------------------------------8-49
V
VDI ----------------------------------------------- 5-111, 5-112
Vector-To-Final ------------------------------------------ 5-146
Vertical deviation guidance --------------------- 5-91, 5-92
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)-------- 2-9, 2-24, 5-111
Vertical navigation ----------------------------------------5-91
Vertical speed guidance ------------------------- 5-91, 5-92
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) -----------------------2-2, 2-8
VFR Code --------------------------------------------------4-29
VNAV (VNV)5-33, 5-40, 5-41, 5-91, 5-92, 5-110, 5-111,
A-16, C-6
VNV indications, PFD -------------------------------------2-24
VNV Target Altitude -------------------------------- 2-9, 2-24
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic ------------------------------------2-26
190-00692-00 Rev. B
VOL/ID Knob -----------------------------------------------4-17
VOL/SQ Knob ----------------------------------------------4-14
Voltmeter----------------------------------3-2, 3-4, 3-7, 3-12
Volume -----------------------------------------------------8-52
VOL Annunciation-----------------------------------------4-34
VOR
Information ------------------------------------- 5-49–5-50
Nearest ------------------------------------------ 5-58–5-59
Selection -------------------------------------------------4-15
VSI--------------------------------------------------------- 5-112
Vspeed references ----------------------------------------- 2-5
W
WAAS -------------------------------------- 5-98, 5-137, A-11
Warning ----------------------------------------------- A-1, A-2
Warranty -------------------------------------------------------- i
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing --------------------------------- D-3
Skipping -------------------------------------------------- D-3
Waypoint, user
Comment ------------------------------------------------5-52
Information ------------------------------------- 5-32–5-37
Waypoint Pages (WPT) -----------------------------------1-27
Weather (real-time)---------------------------------------- 1-4
Weather Data Link Page --------------------------- 6-6, 6-26
weather products ------------------------------------------ 6-4
WIND Softkey ----------------------------------------------6-21
Wind vector ------------------------------------------------5-11
WX Softkey --------------------------- 8-7, 8-15, 8-29, 8-37
X
XM Radio Entertainment --------------------------------4-37
XM Satellite Radio ---------------------------------- 6-1, 8-47
XM Service Activation ------------------------------------8-48
XM weather/radio ----------------------------------------- 1-4
XPDR Softkey ------------------------4-25, 4-26, 4-28, 4-29
Z
Zoom
Auto ------------------------------------------------------- 5-7
Range ----------------------------------------------------5-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
I-5
INDEX
BLANK PAGE
I-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Piper PA32
190-00692-00 Rev. B
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising